7.1 - 7.2 - 7.3 MG MCCBs

Merlin Gerin
Compact LV circuit breakers

and switch-disconnectors
Catalogue
80 to 3200A
01
Compact NS 80 A
Compact NS 100 to 250 A
Things
will never be
Compact NS 400 to 630 A
the same
New Compact NS,
setting the standard, once again...
The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994

revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuit
breakers. Innovative, flexible and attractive, Compact NS
rapidly set the standard in its field.
Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate,

Compact NS 630 to 1600 A extending the Compact NS range to high power ratings to
offer a comprehensive and consistent range from 80 to
3200 A.
Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic control

units, Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers integrate
electrical measurement and analysis functions.
The communications option makes it possible to control
power consumption, simplify maintenance and improve
operating comfort.
A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories is

Compact NS 1600 to 3200 A also available to meet the needs of even more
applications.
Compact NS, simply a step ahead…

...a solution for all installation configurations
Manual Compact NS250 Compact NS250 with motor

with thermal-magnetic mechanism Withdrawable Compact
trip unit NS250 on chassis
...simplified installation
Connection parts
for Compact NS
...optimised protection and

accurate measurements
...an optimised range
Compact NS1600
Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A
General contents
Introduction 6
1
Functions and characteristics 15
2
Installation recommendations 131
3
Dimensions 155
4
Connection 193
5
Electrical diagrams 209
6
Additional characteristics 237
7
Catalogue numbers 251
8
More information about
Schneider Electric 293 9
Compact NS,
even more applications...
Protection of LV distribution systems Page 18
1 Protection for:
■ Distribution systems supplied by transformers
■ Distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets
■ Long cables in IT and TN systems.
Installation :
■ In power switchboards
Special applications:
■ Single-phase and two-phase systems (see page 36)
■ 1000 V distribution systems (see page 38)
■ 400 Hz distribution systems (see page 40)
■ DC systems (see page 42).
All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indication
and are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC 60947-1 and 2.
Protection of motor feeders Page 44
When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect the
cables and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit,
Compact NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor against
overloads.
The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakers
automatically ensures type-2 coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with
standard IEC 60947-4-1.
Protection of industrial control panels Page 52
The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to

meet the specific requirements of machines:
■ Compliance with international standards IEC 60947-2 and
UL 508 / CSA 22-2 No. 14
■ Compliance with U.S. standard UL 489
■ Protection against overloads and short-circuits
■ Positive contact indication
■ Installation in universal and functional enclosures.
Earth-leakage protection Page 54
Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risks
of faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker,
earth-leakage protection is provided by:
■ Adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker
■ Using a specific Micrologic control unit
■ Using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids.
6
Switch-disconnectors Page 58
A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit

control and isolation.
All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector
1
function, including:
■ Earth-leakage protection
■ Motor mechanism
■ Ammeter, etc.
For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offering
positive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues.
Source-changeover systems Page 66 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)
N R To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are

connected to two power sources:
■ A normal source
■ A replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal
source is not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources during
switching.
A source-changeover system can be:
■ Manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices
■ Remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added
■ Automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to
the other on the basis of external parameters.
UL 489 applications
Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governed
by standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue).
7
...a solution for all
installation configurations
The Compact NS range now covers all Compact NS100 to 630

ratings from 80 to 3200 A:
1 ■ Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fixed,
withdrawable, front or rear
connections, manual or electrical
Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
operation.
■ Compact NS1600 to 3200 A, fixed,
front connection, manual operation.
The rating plates on the front
compact panel of each device indicate
NS 250 N
the breaking capacity
Ui750V Uimp8kV
Ue Icu (N, H or L).
(V) (kA)
220/240 85
380/415 36
440 35
500 30
525 22
660/690 8
250 50
Ics = 100 % Icu
IEC 947-2 cat A

UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA
N: standard breaking
capacity
compact
NS 250 H
Ui750V Uimp8kV
Ue Icu
(V) (kA)
220/240 100
380/415 70
440 65
500 50
525 35
660/690 10
250 85
Ics = 100 % Icu
Compact NS630b to 1600
IEC 947-2 cat A
Breaking capacity
H: high breaking capacity Icu at 415 V
compact
NS 250 L
Ui750V Uimp8kV
Ue Icu
(V) (kA)
220/240 150
380/415 150
440 130
500 70
525 50
660/690 20
250 100
Ics = 100 % Icu
IEC 947-2 cat A

L: very high breaking

capacity
Total discrimination
as standard

Breaking capacity
Icu at 415 V
Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers

is total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low short-
circuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used with
the circuit breaker.
8
1
Manual Compact NS250 Compact NS250 with motor Plug-in Compact NS250
with thermal-magnetic mechanism on base
trip unit
Compact NS400 with Withdrawable Compact

electronic trip unit NS250 on chassis
Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800
Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)
9
...simplified installation
Compact circuit breakers make it 5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

possible to standardise switchboards for
1 faster installation.
All type L Compact circuit breakers
(150 kA) are housed in the same case
as the type N and type H models
with the same ratings.
Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 A
can be easily installed side-by-side
80 A 100 to 250 A 400 to 630 A
in a minimum amount of space.
630 to 1600 A 1600 to 3200 A
Many connection
possibilities
Numerous connection possibilities, including front and
rear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars,
as well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, are
available using accessories that can be rapidly added
to the circuit breaker.
Connection parts
for Compact NS
Plug-in and withdrawable

versions
Plug-in and withdrawable versions for:
c Fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker
without exposure to live parts
c Standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and
circuit breaker installation at a later date
c Visible break possibility.
Busways
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can be
installed in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalis
range of busbar trunking.
10
...optimised protection
and accurate measurements
Each Compact NS circuit breaker Compact NS100 to 630

provides different types of protection, On Compact NS100 to NS250 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic and
depending on the trip unit or control unit
selected.
Additional measurement and indication
electronic trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly fitted to the circuit
breakers. It is therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following a
modification in an installation.
On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units are
1
functions are available: interchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large number
of protection settings:
c On Compact NS100 to 630, by adding Standard:
an electrical auxiliary to the circuit ■ Specific indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.)
breaker Optional:
■ Built-in ammeter
c On Compact NS630b to 3200, ■ Earth-fault protection
depending on the Micrologic control ■ Communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker
unit selected. operation to an electrical distribution control, monitoring and automation
system via Digipact modules (see page 70)
TM thermal-magnetic Voltage presence indication

trip unit module
Compact NS250
STR electronic trip unit Ammeter module

Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic control
units that are interchangeable on site.
Micrologic 2.0 and 2.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0 and
5.0 A control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-fault
protection on Micrologic 6.0 A and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0 A
control units.
The ammeter version of Micrologic control units provides current measurements.
These units are equipped with a digital display and bargraph, used in conjunction
with simple navigation buttons. Access to the desired parameters and settings
is direct and navigation between screens is intuitive. Settings are greatly simplified
by direct display on the screen.
Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

Compact NS1600 5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A
11
...an optimised range
A complete system of add-on modules for 16

Compact NS:
1 Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate

availability of parts for all solutions.
Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installation
and connection accessories are the same for a given
15
frame size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g.

auxiliary contacts, MN and MX voltage releases, etc.): 5
■ Compact NS80
■ Compact NS100 to NS250
■ Compact NS400 to NS630 12
■ Compact NS630b to 1600
■ Compact 1600b to 3200.
8
7
11
9
10
13
2
4
3
6
14
1 Breaking unit
2 Trip units or control units
3 Vigi earth-leakage protection module
4 Insulation monitoring module
5 Voltage presence indicator
6 Ammeter module
7 MN and MX voltage releases
8 Multifunction auxiliary contact
9 Direct rotary handle
10 Extended rotary handle
11 Motor mechanism
12 Plug-in base
13 Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis
14 Connection accessories
15 Short terminal shields
16 Long terminal shields
12
...modern products
Open communication ...

Equipped with a communications option, Compact NS
circuit breakers fit perfectly in the Digipact installation
management system or other supervision systems. Management
PM150 power
meter
1
Via a PC or a PLC, the operator can:
■ Display the status of each circuit breaker and its
settings
■ Control the circuit breakers
■ Display faults
■ Access measurements supplied by the electronic Circuit breaker
control units. or other power
actuator
ModBus / JBus
CLS150 indication
and local-control
module
Digipact internal bus
Multi 9 control
DC150 data concentrator device and
ATB 1S
interface
UA150 automatic
source-changeover
controller
RHU residual-
current relay with
separate toroid
RMH earth-
leakage monitor
Digipact installation-management system
... and protection of the environment

Schneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting
right from the design stage of products through to the end of their service life:
■ The materials used for Compact NS are not dangerous for the environment
■ The production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO 14001
standard
■ Filtered breaking for the high ratings eliminates pollution in the switchboard
■ The energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant
■ The materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product
service life.
13
2
14
Compact NS Functions and characteristics
Selection of a Compact NS circuit breaker Presentation 8

depends on the application requiring protection
(distribution systems, motor feeders, etc.) and on General characteristics 16
the prescribed installation conditions (see section Protection of distribution systems
“Installation, connection and accessories”).
Overview of solutions 18
Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A 20
Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 3200 A
TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 250
MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630
22
24
26
2
Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 3200 30
Special cases:
■ Single-phase and two-phase systems 36
■ 1000 V systems 38
■ 400 Hz applications 40
■ Circuit breaker selection for DC applications 42
Motor protection
Compact NS80H-MA 46
NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units 47
NS100 to 250 circuit breakers with STR22ME electronic trip unit 48
NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit 50
Protection of industrial control panels
Circuit breaker NSC100N 53
Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures 54
UL508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking 55
Earth-leakage protection
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630 57
Control and isolation
Compact NSC100 and NS100 to 630NA switch-disconnectors 60
Compact NS630bNA to 1600NA switch-disconnectors 62
Compact NS1600b to 3200NA switch-disconnectors 64
Source-changeover systems
Presentation 66
Manual source-changeover systems 67
Remote-operated systems 68
Controllers 69
Communication
COM option in Compact 70
Compact in a communication network 74
Installation, connection and accessories
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 78
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 84
Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable version) 85
Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) 104
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) 105
Test equipment 129
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
More information about Schneider Electric 292
15
Functions and General characteristics
characteristics
MERLIN GERIN Compliance with standards

Compact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following:
compact ■ International recommendations:
NS160 H ■ IEC 60947-1 - general rules
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. ■ IEC 60947-2 - circuit breakers
Ue Icu ■ IEC 60947-3 - switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc.
(V) (kA) ■ IEC 60947-4 - contactors and motor starters
2 220/240
380/415
440
500/525
660/690
100
70
65
50
10
■ IEC 60947-5.1 and following - control circuit devices and switching elements;
automatic control components
■ European (EN 60947-1 and EN 60947-2) and the corresponding national
standards:
250 85 ■ France NF
Ics = 100% Icu ■ Germany VDE
■ U.K. BS
cat A
■ Australia AS
■ Italy CEI
IEC 947.2 ■ the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd’s
Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.)
Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate:
■ French standard NF C 79-130 and the recommendations issued by the
Ui: rated insulation voltage CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools.
Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please
Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values consult us.
of the rated operational voltage Ue
cat: utilisation category
Icw: rated short-time withstand current Pollution degree
Ics: service breaking capacity Compact NS circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III
suitable for isolation
environments as defined by IEC standard 60947 (industrial environments).
Tropicalisation
Compact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by the
following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions:
■ IEC 68-2-1 - dry cold (-55° C)
■ IEC 68-2-2 - dry heat (+85° C)
■ IEC 68-2-30 - damp heat (95% relative humidity at 55°C)
■ IEC 68-2-52 - salt mist (severity level 2).
Environmental protection
Compact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns for
environmental protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts of
Compact NS630b to NS3200 circuit breakers are marked as specified in applicable
standards.
Ambient temperature
■ Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -25° C and +70° C.
For temperatures higher than 40° C (65° C for circuit breakers used to protect
motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation.
■ Circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operating
temperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into
service when the ambient temperature is between -35° C and -25° C.
■ The permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers in
the original packing is -50° C (1) to +85° C.
Discrimination
As standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuit
breakers positioned in series in an installation.
CB1
CB2
(1) -40° C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.
16
Positive contact indication
All Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC
standard 60947-2:
■ The isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position
■ The operating handle cannot indicate the “OFF” position unless the contacts
are effectively open
■ Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open.
Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability
of the position-indication system.
The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing:
■ The mechanical reliability of the position indication system
2
■ The absence of leakage currents
■ Overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream
connections.
Installation in class II switchboards

All Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be
installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664),
without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special
operations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a
motor mechanism.
Degree of protection
As per standards IEC 60529 (IP degree of protection) and EN 50102
(IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts).
Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields
With toggle IP40 IK07
With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

standard / VDE
Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With toggle IP40 IK07
With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

standard / VDE
MCC IP435
CNOMO IP547
With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08
With motor mechanism IP40 IK07
17
Functions and Protection of distribution systems
characteristics Overview of solutions
Protection of distribution systems means

protection of: G
c Systems supplied by a transformer
c Systems supplied by an engine
generator set
c Long cables in IT and TN systems.
2
Power distribution
Selection of circuit breakers up to 630 A Page 20
Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 … 12.5 … 60… 250…
100 160 250 400 630
Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
Breaking capacity N 25 36 36 45 45
(kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70
380/415 V L 150 150 150 150 150
Accompanying trip units up to 630 A Page 24
Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to 630
Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A Page 22

+ Rated current (A) 250 … 320 … 400 … 500… 640…
630 800 1000 1250 1600
Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600
Special case of DC systems: Breaking capacity N 50 50 50 50 50

TM thermal-magnetic trip units for Compact NS100 (kA rms) H 70 70 70 70 70
to 250 and MP magnetic trip units for Compact 380/415 V L 150 150 150 - -
NS400 and 630 may be used to protect DC Rated current (A) 640 … 800 ... 1000 … 1250 …
distribution systems.
1600 2000 2500 3200
Compact NS1600bNS2000 NS2500 NS3200
Breaking capacity N 70 70 70
(kA rms) H 85 85 85
380/415 V
Accompanying control units up to 3200 A Page 30
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit
breakers and can be changed on site.
18
Power distribution (cont.)
Single-phase or two-phase distribution Page 36
Rated current (A) 16… 100 125… 160 160… 250
Compact NS100 1P/2P NS160 1P/2P NS250 1P
Built-in thermal-magnetic
trip units
Breaking capacity 1P 2P 1P 2P 1P
2
(kA rms) 220 V N 25 85 25 85 25
H 40 100 40 100 -
1000 V distribution Page 38

Rated current (A) 60… 400
Compact NS400 1000V
Breaking capacity:
10 kA rms at 1000 V
STR23SP electronic trip unit

specially designed for
1000 V applications
19
characteristics Compact NS circuit breakers
up to 630 A
Compact circuit breakers

Number of poles
Control manual toggle
direct or extended rotary handle
electric
Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
plug-in (on base) front connection
rear connection
withdrawable (on chassis) front connection
2 Compact NS250H
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2
Rated current (A) In 40 °C
65 °C
rear connection
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui

Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz
DC
Type of circuit breaker
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V
50/60 Hz 380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
DC 250 V (1P)
500 V (2P in series)
Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu
Suitability for isolation
Utilisation category
Endurance (cycles F/0) mechanical
electrical 440 V In/2
In
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V
480 V
600 V
Electrical characteristics as per UL508
Compact NS630L
480 V
600 V
Protection
Trip units
Overload protection long time Ir (In x …)
Short-circuit protection short time lsd (Ir x …)
instantaneous Ii (In x …)
Earth-fault protection lg (In x …)
Zone selective interlocking ZSI
Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module
combination with Vigirex relay
Current measurements
Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
MX shunt and MN undervoltage releases
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module and ammeter module
Insulation-monitoring module
Remote communication by bus
Device-status indication
Device remote operation
Transmission of settings
Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms
Transmission of measured current values
Installation
Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders
terminal shields and interphase barriers
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) W x H x D fixed, front connections 2-3P / 4P
(1) 2P in 3P case for type N only Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P / 4P
(2) specific trip units are available for operational Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)
voltages > 525 V
(3) operational voltage i 500 V.
20
NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
2(1), 3, 4 2(1), 3, 4 2(1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c
100
100
c
160
150
c
250
220
c
400
320
c
630
500
2
750 750 750 750 750
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690
500 500 500 500 500
N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L
85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150 85 100 150
25 70 150 36 70 150 36 70 150 45 70 150 45 70 150
25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
18 50 100 30 50 70 30 50 70 30 50 100 30 50 70
18 35 100 22 35 50 22 35 50 22 35 100 22 35 50
8 10 75 8 10 20 8 10 20 10(2) 20(2) 75(2) 10(2) 20(2) 35(2)
50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -
50 85 100 50 85 100 50 85 100 - 85 - - 85 -
100% 100% 100% 100% 100% (3)
c c c c c
A A A A A
50 000 40 000 20 000 15 000 15 000
50 000 40 000 20 000 12 000 8 000
30 000 20 000 10 000 6 000 4 000
85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200
25 65 130 35 65 130 35 65 130 42 65 130 42 65 130
10 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50 20 35 50
85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 - 85 85 -
25 65 - 35 65 - 35 65 - 42 65 - 42 65 -
10 10 - 10 10 - 18 18 - 18 18 - 30 30 -
TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)

c c c c
- c c c
c c c c
- - - c
- - - c
c c c c
c c c c
- - - c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c c c
c c c c
- - - c
- - - c
- - - c
c c
c c
c c
105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110 / 185 x 255 x 110
1.6 to 1.9 / 2.1 to 2.3 6.0 / 7.8
21
characteristics Compact NS circuit breakers
from 630 up to 3200 A

Number of poles
electric
rear connection
rear connection
2 Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2

Rated current (A)
Rated insulation voltage (V)

In
Ui
50 °C
65 °C (1)
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp

Compact NS800H DC
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220/240 V
50/60 Hz 380/415 V
440 V
500/525 V
660/690 V
DC 250 V
500 V
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs Value or % Icu
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical
In
690 V In/2
In
Compact NS2000H
Pollution degree
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (kA) 240 V
480 V
600 V
Protection and measurements
Interchangeable control units
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)
Residual earth-leakage protection I n
Protection of the fourth pole
Additional indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts
Voltage releases MX shunt release
MN undervoltage release
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions fixed devices, front connections (mm) 3P
HxWxD 4P
Weight fixed devices, front connections (kg) 3P
4P
Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems)
Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems
(1) 65°C with vertical connections. See the temperature

derating tables for other types of connections.
22
NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600 NS1600b NS2000 NS2500 NS3200
3, 4 3, 4 3, 4
c c c
c c -
c c -
N H L N H N H
c c c c c c c
c c c c c - -
c c c c c - -
c c c c c - -
630
630
750
800
800
1000
1000
1250
1250
750
1600
1510
1600
1550
750
2000
1900
2500
2500
3200
2970
2
8 8 8
690 690 690
500 500 500
N H L N H N H
50 70 150 50 70 85 125
50 70 150 50 70 70 85
50 65 130 50 65 65 85
40 50 100 40 50 65 -
30 42 25 30 42 65 -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
75% 50% 100% 75% 50% 65 kA 75%
25 25 10 25 25 40 40
17 17 7 17 17 28 28
c c c
B B A B B B B
10000 10000 6000
6000 5000 5000 3000
5000 4000 2000 2000
4000 3000 2000 2000
2000 2000 1000 1000
III III III
N H L N H N H
50 65 125 50 65 - 85 125 -
35 50 100 35 50 - 65 85 -
25 50 - 25 50 - 50 - -
Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A Micrologic 5.0 A Micrologic 6.0 A Micrologic 7.0 A
c c c c c c
- c - c c c
c c c c c c
- - - - c -
- - - - - c
- - c c c c
c c c c c c
- - c c c c
c c
c c
c c
c c c c c c
c c c c - -
- - c c c c
- - c c c c
- - c c c c
c -
c -
c c
327 x 210 x 147 350 x 420 x 160
327 x 280 x 147 350 x 535 x 160
14 24
18 36
23
characteristics TM and STR trip units
for Compact NS100 to 250
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, 13 16 25 40 63 80 100 125 200 250
types N, H and L, may be equipped with TM-D

either a TM thermal-magnetic trip unit or an
STR22 electronic trip unit. A mechanical STR22SE
mismatch-protection system avoids
TM-G
breaker and trip unit mismatches.
STR22GE
TM-D
2 TM-G
Standard protection Protection of systems Protection of DC

supplied by generators. distribution systems
Protection of long
cables
TM thermal-magnetic trip units

t 1 2
1
Ir Im TM 250 D
10 5
250A / 40°C
9 6
1 .8 8 7
2 .9
x 250A x 250A Ir Im
0 Ir Im I
1 overload protection threshold

Protection
2 short-circuit protection pick-up The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
Overload protection
Thermal protection with an adjustable threshold.
Short-circuit protection
Magnetic protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating.
On four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the,
4P 3d type (neutral unprotected),
4P 3d + N/2 type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In).
TM thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 250D TM16G to 63G

Ratings (A) In at 40 °C 16 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 16 25 40 63
Compact NS100 c c c c c c c c - - - - c c c c
Compact NS160 c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c
Compact NS250 c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c
Overload protection (thermal)
Current setting (A) Ir adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In
Short-circuit protection (magnetic)
Current setting (A) Im fixed adjustable fixed
Compact NS100 190 300 400 500 500 500 640 800 63 80 80 125
Compact NS160/250 190 300 400 500 500 500 1000 1250 1250 1250 5 to 10 x In 63 80 80 125
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 56 56 63 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
24
STR22 electronic trip units
t 1 7 3 6
1
2 In=100A STR 22 SE alarm %Ir

90
105
Io Ir Im
3 .8 .9 .9 .93 5 6
.7 1 .88 .95 4 7 + -
4 .63 .85 .98 3 8
5
2
.5 .8 1 2 10
Ir Im x In x Io x Ir test
0 Ir Im I
Protection
1 long-time threshold (overload protection)
2 long-time tripping delay The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) Overload protection
4 short-time tripping delay True rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold.
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection)
6 test connector
7 percent load indication Short-time and instantaneous protection:
c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay;
c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch
to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Indications
A LED on the front indicates the percent load:
Protection of the fourth pole c ON - load is > 90% of Ir setting
c Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting.
Test
A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the
front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories.
STR electronic trip units STR22SE STR22GE

Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 °C (*) 40 80 100 160 250(*) 40 100 160 250(*)
Circuit breaker Compact NS100 N/H/L c - c - - n n - -
Compact NS160 N/H/L c c c c - n n n -
Compact NS250 N/H/L c c c c c n n n n
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1
48 settings 48 settings
Time delay (s) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 12…15
(min.…max.) at 6 x Ir 5...7.5 -
at 7.2 x Ir 3.2...5.0 -
Short-circuit protection (Short Time)
Pick-up (A) Im = Ir x … 2...10 2...10
Accuracy ± 15 % 8 settings 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fixed fixed
max. resettable time i 40 i 40
max. break time i 60 i 60
Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii fixed u 11 x In fixed u 11 x In
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection -
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir -
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir -
(*) If the STR22SE and STR22GE 250 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the
circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60° C or 0.9 at 70° C.
Setting example
What is the overload-protection threshold of a Io Ir
Compact NS250 circuit breaker equipped with an .8 .9 .9 .93
.7 1 .88 .95
STR22SE 160 A trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ? .63 .85 .98
Answer: .5 .8 1
In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A. x In x Io
25
characteristics MP and STR trip units
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, 60 250 400 500 630
types N, H and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, may STR23SE / STR53UE

be equipped with any of the STR23SE,
STR23SE / STR53UE
STR23SV, STR53UE and STR53SV
electronic trip units. STR23SV / STR53SV
The STR53UE and STR53SV trip units MP
offer a wider range of settings and the
STR53UE offers a number of optional Standard protection Protection of systems supplied by
with selectivity generators. Protection of long cables
2 protection, measurement and

communications functions.
For DC applications, the Compact NS400H
Protection of DC
distribution systems
Protection of systems U > 525 V
and 630H circuit breakers are equipped Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected and
with a built-in MP magnetic trip unit. the operational voltage of the circuit breaker.
Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only four
trip-unit catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage:
c U i 525 V: STR23SE or STR53UE
c U > 525 V: STR23SV or STR53SV.
Trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends on the
circuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting.
For example, for an STR23SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the tripping
threshold is:
c 250 A, when installed on a Compact NS400 250 A
c 630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630.
STR23SE (U < 525 V) and STR23SV (U > 525 V)

electronic trip units
t 6 1 7 3
1
2 STR 23 SE alarm 90
105 %Ir
Io Ir Isd
.8 .9 .9 .93 5 6
3 .7 1 .88 .95 4 7
.63 .85 .98 3 8
4 .8 1 2 10
.5
5 x In x Io x Ir
Ir Isd
+ -
0 Ir Im I test

2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)
4 short-time tripping delay Protection
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
6 test connector Overload protection
7 percent load indication Long-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fixed tripping delay:
c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Short-time and instantaneous protection:
c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch
to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
(neutral protection at In).
Indications
c ON - load is > 90% of Ir setting
c Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting.
Test
26
STR53UE (U < 525 V) and STR53SV (U > 525 V)
t 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 (*) 9 7 (*)
1
6
2 STR 53 UE >Ir >Isd >Ig
7 %Ir test fault
Io Ir Isd Ii Ig µP
3 .7
.8 .9
1 .88
.9 .93
.95 3
4 5
6 3
4 6
8 .4
.5 .6
.7 > Ir
4 A
2
.6 .85 .98 2 8 2 10 .3 .8
11 1 tr
.5 1 .8 1 1.5 10 1.5 .2 > Im
x In x Io x Ir x In x In
5 tsd
tr tsd tg > Ih
test 8 16 .3 .3 .4 .4
4 (s).2 (s) .3 In I1 I2 I3
+ - .2 .3 Ir Isd li
0 Ir Isd Ii I 2 .1 .1 .2 .2
1 16 0 .1
0 .1
(s) @ 6 Ir
on I2 t off on I 2t off
2 long-time tripping delay
3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection)
4 short-time tripping delay
Protection
5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials.
6 optional earth-fault pick-up Overload protection
7 optional earth-fault tripping delay Long-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay:
8 test connector c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1)
9 battery and lamp test pushbutton
c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1).
Earth-fault protection (T) (see the “Options for c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay,
the STR53UE electronic trip unit” section on the with or without constant I2 t
following pages). c Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up.
With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UE Protection of the fourth pole
electronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor can On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch
be installed. Available ratings of external neutral to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/2 (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d
sensors: 150, 250, 400, 630 A. (neutral protection at In).
Overload LED (% Ir)

c When ON, the load is > 90% of Ir setting
c When flashing, the load is > 105% of Ir setting.
Fault indications
A LED signals the type of fault:
c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir)
c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd)
c Earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (Ig)
c Microprocessor malfunction:
c Both (Ig) and (Isd) LEDs ON
c (Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed).
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LED
indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve
battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be
turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton. The LED
automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset.
Test
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (% Ir), (Ir), (Isd) and (Ig) LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature
is detected.
Options
Four options are available:
c Earth-fault protection T
c Ammeter I
c Zone selective interlocking ZSI
c Communications option COM.
27
characteristics MP and STR trip units
for Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.)
Trip units STR23SE (U i 525V) STR53UE (U i 525V)

STR23SV (U > 525V) STR53SV (U > 525V)
Ratings (A) In 20 to 70 ° C (1) 150 250 400 630 150 250 400 630
Circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L c c c - c c c -
Compact NS630 N/H/L - - - c - - - c
Overload protection (Long time)
Current setting Ir = In x … 0.4...1 0.4...1
adjustable, 48 settings adjustable, 48 settings
Time delay (s) fixed adjustable
(min.…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 90...180 8...15 34...50 69...100 138...200 277...400
2 at 6 x Ir
at 7.2 Ir
Short-circuit protection (Short time)
5...7.5
3.2...5.0
0.4...0.5 1.5...2
0.2...0.74 1...1.4
3...4
2...2.8
6...8
4...5.5
12...16
8.2...11
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 2...10 1.5...10

accuracy ± 15 % adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settings
Time delay (ms) fixed adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I2t" option
max. resettable time < 40 < 15 < 60 < 140 < 230
max. break time < 60 < 60 < 140 < 230 < 350
Short-circuit protection (instantaneous)
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 11 1.5...11
fixed adjustable, 8 settings
Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection
Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/2 0.5 x Ir 0.5 x Ir
Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir
Options
Indication of fault type - c (standard)
Zone selective interlocking ZSI - c (2)
Communications COM - c (2)
Built-in ammeter I - c (2)
Earth-fault protection T - c (2)
(1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload
protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60° C or 0.9 at 70° C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50° C, 0.9 at 60° C or 0.85 at 70° C for the Compact NS630.
(2) This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit.
Setting example Io Ir
What is the overload-protection threshold of a .8 .9 .9 .93
.7 1 .88 .95
Compact NS400 circuit breaker equipped with .63 .85 .98
an STR23SE (or STR23SV) trip unit set .8 1
.5
to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8 ?
x In x Io
Answer.
In x Io x Ir = 400 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 160 A.
The identical trip unit, with identical settings but
installed on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, will
have an overload-protection threshold of:
630 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 250 A.
28
Possible Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit
combinations:
c I Earth-fault protection (T)
c T Type Residual
c I+T Pick-up Ig = In x … 0.2 to 1
c I + COM Accuracy ± 15% adjustable, 8 settings
c I + T + COM Time delay adjustable, 4 settings
c ZSI “constant I 2t” function max. resettable time 60 140 230 350
c ZSI + I max. break time < 140< 230 < 350 < 500
c ZSI + T
c ZSI + I + T
c ZSI +I + COM
c ZSI + I + T + COM
Ammeter (I)
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
load. The value of each current (I1, I2, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayed
2
by pressing a scroll button.
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
Ammeter display limits:
c Minimum current > 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed
c Maximum current < 10 x In.
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)

A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire.
In the event of a short-time or earth fault:
c If a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit
breaker, which applies the set time delay
c If the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker
trips after its shortest time delay.
In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker.
The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination is
maintained throughout the installation.
The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selective
interlocking function. Consequently, the ZSI option cannot be implemented
between two Compact NS circuit breakers.
Opto-electronic outputs
Using opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internal
circuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user.
Communications option (COM)

This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
c Settings
c Phase and neutral currents (rms values)
c Highest current of the three phases
c Overload-condition alarm
c Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
MP DC trip units
Im(A)
4400
30005000
2500
3800 3500
5700
2000 4000
In Im
Magnetic trip units for Compact NS400/630 three-pole, type H circuit breakers.
These trip units are specifically designed to protect DC distribution systems.
They are not interchangeable. The circuit breaker and trip unit are supplied
fully assembled.
Built-in trip units MP1 MP2 MP3
Circuit breaker Compact NS400H c c -
Compact NS630H c c c
Pick-up (A) Im adjustable adjustable adjustable
800...1600 1250...2500 2000...4000
29
characteristics Micrologic control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200
Micrologic 2.0 and 5.0 control units Protection

for protection of power circuits. Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
Micrologic 5.0 provides in addition, long-time rating plug.
time discrimination for short circuits. Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
Micrologic 5.0
Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.
Selection of I2 t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
2 Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2) or
neutral protection at In (4P 4d).
Indications
Overload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the current
exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
Test
long time
Ir tr alarm
2
.8 (s)
8
.7 .9 4 12
1 .6 .95 2 16 5
.5 .98 1 20
.4 1 .5 24
x In @ 6 Ir
short time instantaneous

Isd tsd Ii
3
4
5 (s) .4 .4 .3 6 8 10
3 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 4
2 8 .2 .1 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off
x Ir on I t off x In
setting delay
test
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay

2 overload alarm (LED)
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay
4 instantaneous pick-up
5 fixing screw for long-time rating plug
6 test connector
Note.
Micrologic control units that do not include measurement
functions are equipped with a transparent lead-seal cover as
standard.
30
Protection Micrologic 2.0
Long time t
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 Ir
Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug
Time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
tr
accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
Instantaneous Isd
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy ± 10%
Time delay
Protection
Long time
fixed: 20 ms
Micrologic 5.0
0 I
2
Current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug
Time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy 0 to -20% tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
Thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
Short time
Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10
accuracy ± 10%
Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
Instantaneous
Pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy ± 10%
31
characteristics Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Micrologic A control units protect power Protection

circuits. They also offer measurements, Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials.
The selected values are momentarily displayed on the screen, in amperes and in
display, communication and current seconds.
maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different
protection, version 7 provides earth- long-time rating plug.
leakage protection. Overload protection
True rms long-time protection.
Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping.
2
Micrologic 6.0 A
Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection.
9 Selection of I2 t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay.
10 Earth-fault protection
Residual or source ground return earth fault protection.
∆ t= I∆ n= Selection of I2 t type (ON or OFF) for delay.
tsd= tr= MAX
Isd= s Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi).
Ii= Ir= kA
Ig= Operation without an external power supply.
11
tg= c Protected against nuisance tripping.
c DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A.
Neutral protection
On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible.
On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position
switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/2),
100 %
neutral protection at In (4P 4d).
Zone selective interlocking (ZSI)
12 A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to
40 % provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay
before tripping.
13
Overload alarm
A red alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold.
menu
long time
"Ammeter" measurements
alarm 2
Ir
.7
.8
.9
tr
(s) 4 8 12 Micrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents.
1 .6 .95 2 16
7 A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or
.5 .98 1 20
.4 1 .5 24 displays the I1, I2, I3 , IN, Ig,I∆n , stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by
x In @ 6 Ir
successively pressing the navigation button. The load on each phase is indicated
short time instantaneous
Isd tsd Ii continuously by bargraphs.
3
4
5
(s) . 4 .4 . 3 6 8 10
3 2.5 6 .3 .2 4 12 4 The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents < 20% In.
2 8 .2 .1 3 15
1.5 10 .1 2 0 2 off
x Ir on I t off x In
setting delay test Communication option
Ig tg 6
D E F (s) . 4 .4 . 3 In conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the
5 C G .3 .2
B H .2 .1 8 following:
A J .1 2 0 c Settings
on I t off
ground fault c All “ammeter” measurements
c Tripping causes
c Maximeter readings.
1 long-time threshold and tripping delay

2 overload alarm (LED) Fault indications
3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay LEDs indicate the type of fault:
c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir)
5 earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay
6 earth-leakage or earth-fault test button c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd )
7 long-time rating plug screw c Earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or I∆n )
8 test connector c M icroprocessor malfunction (Ap).
9 lamp test, reset and battery test Battery power
10 indication of tripping cause
The fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Under
11 digital display
12 three-phase bargraph and ammeter normal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of
13 navigation buttons approximately 10 years.
Test
front to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units,
the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing
the test button located above the test connector.
Note.
Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-seal
cover as standard.
32
Protection Micrologic 2.0 A
long time
current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 t
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug Ir
time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 tr
thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping
instantaneous
pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd
accuracy: ±10 %
time delay
Ammeter
fixed: 20 ms
Micrologic 2.0 A
0
menu
I
2
continuous current measurements
measurements from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN
accuracy: 1.5% (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)
maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max
Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A

long time Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
current setting (A) Ir = In x … 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1 t Ir
tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug
time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30 % tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600
tr
accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 6 x Ir 0.5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
accuracy 0 to -20 % tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6
thermal memory 20 minutes before and after tripping Isd
short time tsd
pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x … 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Ii
accuracy: ±10 %
time delay (ms) at 10 Ir settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0 I
I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
tsd (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350
tsd (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
instantaneous
pick-up (A) Ii = In x … 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off
accuracy: ±10 %
earth fault Micrologic 6.0 A
pick up (A) Ig = In x … A B C D E F G H J t 2
I t on
accuracy: ±10 % In i 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Ig
400 A < In i 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 2
In > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200 I t off
tg
time delay (ms) settings I2t Off 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
at In or 1200 A I2t On 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
tg (max resettable time) 20 80 140 230 350 0 I
tg (max break time) 80 140 200 320 500
residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 A
sensitivity (A) I n 0.5 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30 t I∆n
accuracy: 0 to -20 %
time delay (ms.) settings 60 140 230 350 800 t∆n
t n (max resettable time) 80 140 230 350 800
t n (max break time) 140 200 320 500 1000
0 I
menu
Ammeter Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A
continuous current measurements
measurements from 20 to 200 % of In I1 I2 I3 IN Ig I∆n
accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 20 % In)
maximeters I1 max I2 max I3 max IN max Ig max I∆n max
Note.
All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source.
The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery.
33
characteristics Micrologic A control units
for Compact NS630b to 3200 (cont.)
Accessories for Micrologic control units

External sensors
External sensor for earth-fault protection
The sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit.
It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection.
The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit
breaker:
c NS630b to NS1600 - 400/1600 CT
c NS1600b to NS2000 - 400/2000 CT
2 External sensor (CT)

c NS2000 to NS3200 - 1000/3200 CT.
Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection
The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the
zero-phase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection with
Micrologic 7.0 A control unit.
Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes.
Inside dimensions (mm)
c 280 x 115 up to 1600 A
c 470 x 160 up to 3200 A.
External sensor for source ground return protection
The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to
earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 control unit to provide the source ground
External sensor for source
ground return protection return (SGR) protection.
External voltage measurement inputs
External voltage measurement inputs are used to supply power for earth leakage
protection.
As standard, the Micrologic 7.0 control unit is supplied by internal voltage
measurement inputs placed downstream of the pole for voltages between 100 and
690 V AC.
On request, external voltage measurement inputs may be ordered for circuit
breakers fed from the load side or for voltages exceeding 690 V.
Long-time rating plug

Four interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting
range for higher accuracy.
As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug.
Setting ranges
Standard Ir = In x… 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.95 0.98 1
Low-setting option Ir = In x… 0.4 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.8
High-setting option Ir = In x… 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 1
Off plug no long-time protection
External power-supply module

Used in conjunction with the Micrologic A control units, this module maintains three
functions when the circuit breaker is OFF or the current is less than 20% In:
c Display of measurements
c Screen backlighting
c Operation of maximeters.
Characteristics:
c Power supply:
c 110/130, 200/240, 380/415 V AC (+ 10% - 15%), consumption 10 VA
c 24/30, 48/60, 100/125 V DC (+20% -20%), consumption 10 W
c Output voltage: 24 V DC; power delivered: 5 W / 5 VA
c Ripple < 5%
c Class 2 isolation.
34
Spare parts for Micrologic control units
Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A
A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials.
When the cover is closed, it is still possible to access:
c The test connector
c The test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function.
Spare battery
Lead-seal cover for

Micrologic A
A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery
service life is approximately ten years.
A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition.
The battery may be replaced on site when discharged.
2
35
characteristics Single-phase and two-phase
systems

Number of poles
electric
rear connection
withdrawable front connection
rear connection
2 Rated current (A)

Rated impulse withstand voltage kV)
Rated operational voltage (V)
In
Ui
Uimp
Ue
40 °C
AC 50/60 Hz
Compact NS160H single-pole DC
Ultimate breaking capacity (kA rms) lcu AC 220 V
50/60 Hz 277 V
380/415 V
440 V
500 V
525 V
660/690 V
DC 250 V (1P)
500 V (2P)
Service breaking capacity (kA rms) lcs % Icu
In
Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1
V AC 50/60 Hz 277 V
Compact NS100N two-pole 480 V
600 V
Type of trip units
Ratings In
Overload protection (thermal) long time Ir
threshold
Short-circuit protection (magnetic) instantaneous lm
pickup
Indication contacts
Voltages releases MX shunt release
Device status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) WxHxD
Weight (kg)
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems
36
NS100 NS160 NS250
1 2 1 2 1
c c c c c
- - - - -
- - - - -
c c c c c
c c c c c
- - - - -
- - - - -
750
8
277
100
750
8
690
100
750
8
277
160
750
8
690
160
750
8
277
250
2
250 500 250 500 250
N H N H N H N H N
25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
- - 25 70 - - 36 70 -
- - 25 65 - - 35 65 -
- - 18 50 - - 30 50 -
- - 18 35 - - 22 35 -
- - 8 10 - - 8 10 -
25 40 50 85 25 40 50 85 25
- - 50 85 - - 50 85 -
100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
c c c c c
A A A A A
20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 10 000
20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 10 000
10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 5 000
N H N H N H N H N
25 40 85 100 25 40 85 100 25
25 40 - - 25 40 - - 25
- - 25 65 - - 25 65 -
- - 10 35 - - 10 35 -
built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic

16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fixed fixed fixed
16 20 25 30 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200 250
fixed fixed fixed
190 300 300 300 500 500 500 640 800 1000 1250 850 850 850
- - -
c c c
- c - c -
- c - c -
- c - c -
- c - c -
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86 70 x 161 x 86 35 x 161 x 86
0.7 1.2 0.7 1.2 0.7
- - - - -
37
characteristics 1000 V systems

Number of poles
Rating of sensors (A)
electric
rear connection
rear connection
2 Electrical characteristics
withdrawable (on chassis)
Ue
front connection
rear connection
AC 50/60 Hz
Rated current (A) In 40 °C
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV) Uimp
Short-time withstand current (kA rms) lcw 0.5 s
1000 V Compact NS400
V AC 50/60 Hz 1s
For ratings above 400A, electrical 1000 V In/2
see the Masterpact In
catalogue. Pollution degree
Interchangeable trip units
Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x …)
Residual earth-leakage protection I n
Add-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication contacts
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed 3P
4P
Source changeover system
Interlocking systems
38
NS400 1000V For ratings above 400 A, see the Compact C and Masterpact catalogues
3
150, 250, 400
c
c
c
c
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us
consult us
1150
2
10
100%
150, 250, 400

1250
8
1000
10
100%
c
standardised
standardised
A
15000
4000
2000
III
STR23SP
c
c
c
-
c
-
-
c
-
c
c
c
c
c
-
-
-
c
c
c
480 x 140 x 110
-
13
-
consult us
39
characteristics 400 Hz applications
Tripping thresholds
The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the
following coefficient:
■ K1 for thermal trip units;
■ K2 for magnetic trip units.
On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coefficients are independent of the unit
adjustment knob position.
Thermal trip units
The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1).
2 Magnetic trip units

The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K2 > 1).
Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers
equipped with low magnetic trip units
(type G).
Electronic trip units
The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the
frequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency related
temperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use.
Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for the
current setting (knob position).
Thermal-magnetic trip units

circuit breaker trip unit thermal setting K1 magnetic K2
at 40 °C setting
NS100N TM16G 16 0.95 63 1.6
TM25G 25 0.95 80 1.6
TM40G 40 0.95 80 1.6
TM63G 63 0.95 125 1.6
NS250N TM16D 16 0.95 240 1.6
TM25D 25 0.95 300 1.6
TM40D 40 0.95 500 1.6
TM63D 63 0.95 500 1.6
TM80D 80 0.9 650 1.6
TM100D 100 0.9 800 1.6
TM125D 125 0.9 1000 1.6
TM160D 160 0.9 1250 1.6
TM200D 200 0.9 1000 (*) 1.6
TM250D 250 0.9 1250 (*) 1.6
(*) for TM 200D and TM250D, Im must be set to its maximum
Electronic trip units

Compact adaptation coefficients
circuit breaker trip unit rating long-time short-time K2
Ir at 50 Hz Ir maxi Irm at 50 Hz
(A at 40 °C) K1 (A)
NS100N STR22SE 40...100 0.4 to 1 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS250N STR22SE 100...250 0.4 to 0.9 2 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR23SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR23SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS400N STR53SE 400 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
NS630N STR53SE 630 0.4 to 0.8 1.5 to 10 Ir 1
C801N STR25DE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 800 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
C1001N STR25DE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 1000 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
C1251N STR25DE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
STR35SE/GE 1250 0.4 to 0.75 1.5 to 10 Ir 0.97
40
Breaking capacity of Compact NS and
Compact circuit breakers at 400 Hz
At 440 V, 400 Hz
circuit breaker breaking capacity
NS100N 12 kA
NS250N 4,5 kA
NS400N 10 kA
2
NS630N 10 kA
C801N 25 kA
C1001N 25 kA
C1251N 25 kA
R MN or MX auxiliary releases
MN/MX For Compact NS100-630
U volt For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 125 V DC rated releases can be
125 V CC
used. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (to
400 Hz
be selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics
Connection depending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker.
U (V) 400 Hz rectifier additional resistor
220/240 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4.2 kΩ-5 W
General Instrument W06 or
Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3
380/420 V Semikron SKB at 1,2/1,3 10.7 kΩ-10 W
Note : other models of rectifier bridges can be used if their characteristics are at least
equivalent to those stated above.
For Compact C801-1251

The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz.
U (V) 400 Hz catalogue number
MN 110/130 V 44925
MN 208/250 V 44926
MN 380/415 V 44932
MX 380/415 V 44914
41
characteristics Circuit breaker selection for DC
applications
Selection criteria
The selection of the type of circuit breaker most suitable for protection of a
DC installation depends mainly on the following criteria:
■ The rated current, which determines the rating of the equipment;
■ The rated voltage, which determines the number of poles in series necessary
for breaking;
■ The maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation, which determines
the breaking capacity;
■ The type of network (see below).
2 type of system
diagrams
and various
earthed systems
one polarity of the DC supply is
earthed
i
a
a centre point of the DC supply is
earthed
i
a
insulated systems
i
a
cases of faults + + +
U/2
U R + R U R
– B – U/2 B – B
A A A
b C b b
C C
fault effect fault A max. Isc Isc close to max. Isc no effect
the positive polarity the positive polarity is the only
is the only one involved one involved, voltage U/2
fault B max. Isc max. Isc max. Isc
both polarities are involved both polarities are involved both polarities are involved
fault C no effect same as fault A but this is the no effect
negative polarity which is involved
most unfavorable case fault A faults A and C fault B
distribution of the the poles required to perform on each polarity there must be the the poles required to perform
breaking poles the break are in series number of poles required to perform the break are shared between
on the positive polarity the break of max. Isc at U/2 the 2 polarities
240 V DC Calculation the short-circuit current (Isc) across the terminals of a battery
300 A When a short-circuit occurs across its terminals, a battery discharges a current
Isc 500 Ah given by Ohm's law:
Ri = 0.5 m /cell
Vb
Isc =
Ri
where Vb = the maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged).
and Ri = the internal resistance equivalent to the sum of the cell resistances (figure
generally given by the manufacturer according to the capacity of the battery).
Example
What is the short-circuit current at the terminals of a standing battery with the
following characteristics:
Capacity: 500 Ah;
Max. discharge voltage: 240 V
(110 cells of 2.2 V);
Discharge current: 300 A;
Autonomy: 1/2 hour;
Internal resistance: 0.5 mΩ per cell.
Ri = 110 x 0.5 10-3 = 55 10-3
240
Isc = = 4.4kA
5 5 1 0−3
As the above calculation shows, the short-circuit current is relatively weak.
Note: If the internal resistance is not known, the following approximate formula can be used:
Isc = kC, where C is the capacity of the battery expressed in Ampere-hours, and k is a
coefficient close to 10 but in any case always lower than 20.
42
Example 1
+ Determine the protection required for a 80 A feeder on a 125 V DC network with an
125 V =
- earthed negative pole and an Isc of 15 kA.
The table below indicates that a NC100H circuit breaker (30 kA, 2P, 125 V) should
NC100 H be used.
3P
80 A The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles should be fitted on the
positive pole of the network.
load An additional circuit breaker pole can be fitted on the negative pole of the network
for isolation purposes.
-
250 V =
Example 2
Determine the protection required for a 100 A feeder on a 250 V DC network with
an earthed middle point and an Isc of 15 kA.
Each pole will be exposed to a maximum of U/2 = 125 V.
2
NC100 H The table below indicates that NC100H (30 kA, 2P, 125 V), NS100N (50 kA, 1P,
4P 125 V) or NS160N (50 kA, 1P, 125 V) circuit breakers should be used.
100 A
The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles must take part in the
load breaking at a voltage of 125 V.
Example 3
+
250 V = Determine the protection required for a 400 A feeder on an unearthed 250 V DC
- network with an Isc of 35 kA.
The table above indicates that NS400H circuit breakers (85 kA, 1P, 250 V) should
NS400H be used. At least 2 poles must take part in breaking.
2P The table opposite indicates that the half the number of circuit breaker poles
400 A
required for breaking should be fitted on the positive pole of the network and the
load other half on the negative pole.
selection table of DC circuit breakers

type rated current (A) breaking capacity (kA) (L/R i 0.015 s) protection against protection against
and (and number of poles required to perform the break) overloads (thermal) short-circuits (magnetic)
trip units 24/48 V 125 V 250 V 500 V 750 V
NS100N 16-25-40-63-80-100 50(1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p) same as for trip units
NS100H 16-25-40-63-80-100 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) used on AC systems
NS100L 16-25-40-63-80-100 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)
NS160N 80-100-125-160 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p)
NS160H 80-100-125-160 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p)
NS160L 80-100-125-160 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)
NS250N 160-200-250 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p)
NS250H 160-200-250 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p)
NS250L 160-200-250 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (2p)
NS400H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) no thermal protection: specially designed for DC
NS630H MP1/MP2/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (2p) an external relay
C1251N-DC P21/P41-1250 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (2p) 50 (3p) 25 (3p) must be provided
43
Functions and Motor protection
The circuit breakers presented here Motor protection up to 37 kW

provide protection against short circuits Motor rating (kW) 0.37 … 37
and are suitable for isolation as defined Compact NS80
by standard IEC 60947-2.

For complete protection of the motor and
its control device, overload protection may
be provided by either the circuit breaker or
a separate Telemecanique thermal relay. Breaking H 70
2
capacity (kA rms)
The control device may be of the direct 380/415 V
on-line type (with or without reversing) General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16
or of the “star-delta” type. The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection.
Combinations are governed by standard Accompanying trip unit Page 46
IEC 60947-4.1. A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection.
Motor protection up to 250 kW

Motor rating (kW) 1.1 … 110 18.5…250
Compact NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
Breaking N 25 36 45
capacity (kA rms) H 70 70 70
380/415 V L 150 150 150
General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those for
distribution systems, but are fitted with specific motor trip units.
Accompanying trip units Page 49 to 51
MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip units
provide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase imbalance.
Motor protection up to 750 kW

Motor rating (kW) 160…750
Protection coordination (as defined by IEC Compact NS630b to 1600
60947-4)
Whatever the power of the motor, the coordination
between the circuit breaker, contactor and relay
can be of either type 1 or 2.
Selection depends on operational requirements
concerning continuity of service and the technical
skills of servicing personnel.
All type 2 Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique combinations
have been tested under the conditions defined by
standards and they are certified ASEFA/LOVAG.
Breaking N 50
capacity (kA rms) H 70
380/415 V L 150
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units
are the same as those for distribution systems.
Accompanying control units Page 30
Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit
breakers.
Micrologic 2.0 A and 5.0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits and
overloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakage
protection.
44
Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit
P (kW) (400 V, 50 Hz) 0.37 1.1 5.5 18.5 37 110 160 250 560 750
Ir (A) 1.5 2.5 12 40 50 80 100 160 200 220 320 500 800 1000 1350
Compact
NS80H-MA MA
MA
Compact
NS100 … NS250
STR22ME
Compact
NS400 … NS630
STR43ME
MA
2
Compact
Micrologic 2.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A
NS630b … NS1600
45
characteristics Compact NS80H-MA
This circuit breaker is specially designed for Compact circuit breakers NS80 H-MA
the protection of motors rated up to 37 kW: Number of poles 3
c
c Due to its high current-limiting Control manual (toggle,
direct or extended rotary handle) c
capacity, it effectively protects motor electric -
starters (type-2 coordination as per Connections fixed front connection c
IEC 60947-4, with contactors) rear connection -
withdrawable front connection -
c Small size for easy installation in rear connection -
motor control centre (MCC) Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
2 switchboards. Rated current (A)

Rated insulation
voltage (V)
Rated impulse
In 65 °C
Ui
Uimp
80
750
8
withstand voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
Ultimate breaking Icu AC 50/60 Hz 220 / 240 V 100
capacity (kA rms) 380 / 415 V 70
440 V 65
500V 25
525V 25
660/690V 6
Compact NS80 H-MA Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100%
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation c
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical 20 000
electrical 440 V In/2 10 000
In 7 000
Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1
Breaking capacity (kA) 240 V 100
480 V 65
600 V 10
Protection
Magnetic trip unit built-in
Rating In 1.5 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 80
Instantaneous short-circuit lm adjustable pick-up
protection 6 … 14 x In
Earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Indication contacts 1 OF + 1 SD
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connections Built-in terminals
Terminal extensions and spreaders -
Terminal shields c
Interphase barriers -
DIN rail plate c
Dimensions (mm) WxHxD 90 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 1.0
46
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit
breakers with MA magnetic trip units
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers, General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16

equipped with an MA magnetic trip unit with
adjustable thresholds, offer: MA trip units
c Short-circuit protection Rating (A) at 65°C In 2.5 6.3 12.5 25 50 100 150 220 320 500
c c c c c c
c Suitability for isolation. Compact N/H/L NS100 - - - -
circuit breaker NS160 - - - c c c c - - -
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers NS250 - - - - - c c c - -
and the trip unit are supplied already H/L NS400 - - - - - - - - c -
assembled. NS630 - - - - - - - - - c
2
Pick-up Im setting setting setting
6...14 x In 9...14 x In 9...14 x In
Compact NS250H
Compact NS400H-MA
47
characteristics Compact NS100 to 250
circuit breakers with STR22ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers, Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers
equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.
unit with adjustable thresholds, offer:
c Short-circuit protection
c Phase-imbalance protection
STR22ME electronic trip unit
c Overload protection Protection
c Suitability for isolation. Overload protection
LT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with tripping
2 class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4.

c Short-time protection with fixed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delay
c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up (15 x In).
Phase-imbalance protection
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips the
circuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The
circuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds.
Overload LED (%Ir)

c OFF: I < 1.05 Ir
Compact NS250 equipped with an STR22ME electronic trip unit c Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir
Test
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
This module opens the contactor if an overload occurs, thus making it possible to:
c Differentiate between tripping due to overloads and short-circuits
c Improve continuity of service (no manual reset following tripping due to an
overload).
This module can also be used to signal a thermal fault.
Characteristics
c Manual reset (local or remote).
c Compatible with the following control voltages:
v 24 to 72 V DC and 24 to 48 V AC
v 110 to 240 V AC / DC.
c Replaces the MN and MX voltage releases.
48
t 1 7 6
1
2
Ir
In=50A ImSTR 22 ME 1,05 Ir
Ir 37.5 40
7,2Ir
35.5 42.5 IEC 947.4 / cl.10
3
33.5 45 7,0s
4
31.5 47.5
5 30 50
A Ir 13 Ir test
0 Ir 13Ir I
1
2
3
4
long-time threshold
tripping class 10 as defined by IEC 60947-4
short-time pick-up
short-time tripping delay
STR22ME trip unit
Ratings (A) 20 to 70 °C
NS100N/H/L
NS160N/H/L
20…100
c
c
150
-
c
220
-
-
2
NS250N/H/L c c c
6 test connector
7 percent load indication Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 10 settings
0.6...1 x In
Tripping class 10
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) fixed
(min…max.) at 1.5 x Ir 120…320
at 6 x Ir 6…15
at 7.2 Ir 4…10
Motor-overload indication LED
Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping threshold u 40% imbalance
Time delay 3.5 to 6 seconds
Pick-up Isd fixed
13 x Ir
Accuracy ± 20 %
Max. resettable time (ms) fixed
10
Max. break time 60
Pick-up Ii fixed
15 x In
Options
SDTAM module c
Overload protection settings (A)

rating (A) thresholds (A)
20 12 12.6 13.4 14.2 15 16 17 18 19 20
25 15 15.7 16.7 17.7 18.7 20 21.2 22.5 23.7 25
40 24 25.5 27 28.5 30 32 34 36 38 40
50 30 31.5 33.5 35.5 37.5 40 42.5 45 47.5 50
80 48 51 54 57 60 64 68 72 76 80
100 60 63 67 71 75 80 85 90 95 100
150 90 95 101 107 113 120 127 135 142 150
220 132 140 148 157 166 177 187 198 209 220
49
circuit breakers with STR43ME
electronic trip unit
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers
equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 20.
unit with adjustable thresholds, offer:
c Phase-imbalance protection
STR43ME electronic trip unit
c Overload protection Protection
c Suitability for isolation. Overload protection
True (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold:
2 c Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fine adjustment

(8 settings from 0.8 to 1)
c Adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 20
as defined by IEC 60947-4.
The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motor
starting class:
c Short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing
maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protection
c Long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing
maximum motor protection.
c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay
Phase-imbalance protection
This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC 60947-4.1 and trips
the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40% or more occurs.
The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds ±10%.
Compact NS630 equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit
Indications: Overload LED (%Ir)

c OFF: I < 1.05 Ir
c Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir
Fault indications
LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping:
c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (> Ir)
c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd)
c Phase imbalance (LED on the right)
c Microprocessor malfunction:
v All four (% Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (phase imbalance) LEDs ON.
Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a fault
occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten
minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory
and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/LED test pushbutton.
The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit
breaker is reset.
Test
The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs.
Self monitoring
The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is
detected.
Options
Three options are available:
c Ammeter (I)
c Contactor tripping module (SDTAM)
c Communication (COM).
50
t 6 1 2 3 7
1
2
STR 43 ME %Ir >Ir >Isd test fault
Io Ir Isd µP
3 .71 .8 .90.93 9 10
.63 .88 .95 8 11 > Ir
4 .56 .85 .98 7 12 A
.5 .8 .8 1 13 tr
5 x In x Io
6
x Ir
> Im
tsd
tr 20 20 > Ih
test
10 10 Ir I1 I2 I3
0 Ir Isd Ii I + - 10A 10A
Ir Isd li
1
2
3
4
long-time threshold
tripping class
short-time pick-up
short-time tripping delay STR43ME trip unit
class
IEC 947-4-1
2
5 instantaneous pick-up Ratings (A) 20 to 70 °C 120 200 320 500
6 test connector Circuit NS400N/H/L c c c -
7 percent load indication breakers NS630N/H/L - - - c
Overload protection (Long Time)
Current setting Ir adjustable, 40 settings - 0.4...0.8 x In
Tripping class 10A, 10, 20
(IEC 60947-4)
Time delay (s) adjustable
(min. ... max.) at 1.5 x Ir 144…198 270…357 433…595
at 6 x Ir 5.8…7.3 10.9…13.1 17.4…21.8
at 7.2 Ir 4…5 7.3…9.1 12…15
Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC 60947-4.1
Tripping threshold u 40% imbalance
Time delay 4 s ± 10 %
Pick-up Isd adjustable, 8 settings - 6...13 x Ir
Accuracy ± 15 %
Time delay (ms) fixed
max. resettable time 10
max. break time 60
Pick-up Ii fixed - 13 x Ir max.
Other functions
Motor-overload LED c
Indications module c
Options
Ammeter (I) c
SDTAM module c
Communication (COM) c
Options for STR43ME trip unit

Ammeter (I)
Possible
A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest
combinations:
load. The value of each current I1, I2, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may be
c I successively displayed by pressing a scroll button.
c I + COM
LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed.
c SDTAM
c SDTAM + I Ammeter display limits
c SDTAM + I + COM c Minimum current u 0.2 x In. Lower currents are not displayed.
c Maximum current i 10 x In.
Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module

(Early-break thermal-fault signal)
See the information on this optional module on page 44.
Communication (COM)
This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules.
Transmitted data:
c Settings;
c Phase currents (rms values);
c Highest current of the three phases;
c Overload-condition alarm;
c Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
51
Functions and Protection of industrial
characteristics control panels
Overview of solutions
Compact NS circuit breakers are Compact NSC100 ( UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2)
specially designed to protect incoming Rated current (A) 12.5…100
feeders and groups of outgoing circuits
on industrial control panels:
c Compliance with standards applicable
worldwide including IEC 60947-2
and UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14
c Overload and short-circuit protection
Breaking N 18
capacity (kA rms)
c Isolation with positive contact
2 indication, making it possible to
service machines safely by isolating
380/480 V
General circuit-breaker characteristics
Accompanying trip unit

Page 16
Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels.
Page 52
them from all power sources The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides:
c Installation in universal and functional c overload protection (adjustable-threshold thermal device)
type enclosures c short-circuit protection (fixed-pick-up magnetic device).
c NA switch-disconnector version. Compact NS100 to 630 ( UL 508 / IEC 60947-2 / CSA22-2)

Rated current (A) 12.5 … 12.5 ... 12.5 ... 60... 250...
100 160 250 400 630
Compact NS100 NS160 NS250 NS400 NS630
Breaking N 25 35 35 42 42
capacity (kA rms) H 65 65 65 65 65
380/480 V
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems and
are also suitable for protection of industrial control panels.
Accompanying trip unit Page 24
The trip units are interchangeable.
Compact NS100 to 250 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STR
electronic trip units.
Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units.
52
Circuit breaker NSC100N
Compact NS100N circuit breakers are Compact circuit breaker NSC100N

specially designed to protect incoming Number of poles 3
Control manual (toggle, c
feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on
direct or extended rotary handle) c
industrial control panels. electric -
Connections fixed front connection c
rear connection -
with- front connection -
drawable rear connection -
Mounting on DIN rail c
Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2
Rated current (A)
Rated insulation
voltage (V)
In 40 °C
Ui
100
750
2
Rated impulse Uimp 8
withstand voltage (kV)
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690
DC 250
Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 220/240 V 42
Compact NSC100N (kA rms) 50/60 380/415 V 18
Hz 440 V 18
500 V 10
525 V 10
DC 125 V 5
250 V (2 P) 5
Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100%
Utilisation category A
Suitability for isolation c
Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical 20 000
electrical 440 V In/2 10 000
In 7 000
Electrical characteristics as per UL 508
Breaking capacity (kA) AC 50/60 Hz 240 V 42
480 V 18
600 V 10
Protection
Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit
Ratings In 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 70 80 100
Instantaneous short-circuit lm fixed pick-up
protection (A) 600 600 600 600 100010001000100010001250
Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module
protection combination with Vigirex relay
Indication and control auxiliaries
Auxiliary contacts c
Early-make or early-break contact c
Voltage releases MN or MX
Installation and connections
Connection built-in terminals
Accessories terminal shields c
interphase barriers -
escutcheons c
Dimensions (mm) 3P 90 x 120 x 80
WxHxD 4P 120 x 120 x 80
Weight (kg) 3P 1.0
4P 1.3
53
Functions and Protection of industrial
characteristics control panels
Trip units, auxiliaries,
installation enclosures
Trip-unit selection
P (hp) (480 V, 3P) 3 10 15 20 30 30 40 50 60 75 125 150 150 250 400
Ir (A) 12 16 25 32 40 48 63 70 80 100 160 205 220 320 500
Compact
NSC100N TMD
Compact
NS100 … NS250 STR22ME
2 Compact
NS400 … NS630
STR43ME / STR23SE / STR53UE
STR electronic trip units are designed for:

c Overload protection
c Phase-failure protection (STR22ME and STR43ME).
TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for:
c Overload protection.
Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protected
upstream in accordance with applicable installation standards.
Circuit breakers trip units UL/CSA approvals
NSC100N TMD “Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter &
General use“
NS100/160/250 N/H STR22ME “Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the line starter”
TMD “Manual Motor Controller:
STR22SE/GE General Use”
NS400/630 N/H STR43ME “Manual Motor Controller:
NA Across the Line Starter”
STR23SE
STR53UE
Auxiliaries
All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user:
c Padlocking devices (in the OFF position);
c Rotary handle
c Status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped)
c Shunt (MX) or undervoltage (MN) releases
c Early-make or early-break contacts.
Rotary handle
Available in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front.
Versions include:
c Black front with black handle
c Yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per
IEC 204 / VDE 0013).
All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position.
Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres).
Early-make or early-break contacts
These auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliary
circuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MN
release, if applicable.
W D
Installation in an enclosure
Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other
devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.)
Minimum enclosure dimensions
Circuit breakers Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm)
NSC100N 300 150 200
H NS100 N/H 457 130 208
NS160 N/H 457 130 208
NS250 N/H 457 130 208
NS400 N/H - - -
NS630 N/H - - -
Installation enclosure
54
UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 marking
The UL 508 / CSA 22-2 no. 14 approval is LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 
for a “Manual Motor Controller” (“across the 34XL

R
UL / CSA logo
NSC100N-NA
line starter” or “general use”). This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
The circuit breakers are 100% rated. indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz Breaking capacity
Vac
240 42
480 25
600 10
Vac 115 230 460 575
ratings (A)
16
20
25
1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph
1
1.5
2
2
3
3
2
3
3
5
5
hp
7.5 10
5 10 7.5 10
7.5 10 10
15 10
15
20
2
32 2 5 5 10 10 20 15 30
40 3 5 7.5 10 15 30 20 30
Horsepower rating
50 3 7.5 10 15 20 30 25 40
63 5 10 10 20 25 40 30 60
70 5 10 15 25 30 50 40 60
80 7.5 10 15 30 30 60 40 75
100 10 15 20 30 40 75 50 100
tripping current 125% 100% rated
temperature rating tightening torque
75°C
wire size lb-inch Nm
Cable cross-section
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu and tightening torques
50 5.5
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
NSC100 device marking

(circuit breaker with built-in trip unit)
LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 

R
34XL UL / CSA logo

NS100-160-250 N/H/NA
Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit
This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering
not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC
indicated here below, or the upstream protective device
interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by
any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation.
SC current rating kA 50/60 Hz Breaking capacity
Vac NS100 NS160 NS250
N H N H N H
240 85 85 85 85 85 85
480 25 65 35 65 35 65
600 10 10 10 10 18 18
tripping current 125% 100% rated
temperature rating tightening torque Terminal kit
75°C reference
wire size lb-inch Nm 3P 4P
14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu
130 11.3 29242 29243 Cable cross-section
12 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al
and tightening torques
4 AWG to 2 AWG Cu,Al 180 20
29259 29260
1 AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al 230 26
NS100 to 250 device marking

(circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit)
In=220A STR 22 ME > 1,05 Ir

Ir 166 177 220A 1ph3ph
157 187 7,2 Ir IEC 947.4 / cl.10 V ac hp + -
148 198 115 15 40
7,0 s 230 50 75
140 209 460 50 150
132 220 575 50 200
A Ir 13Ir 100% rated test
Trip-unit marking
55
Functions and Earth-leakage protection
Earth-leakage protection is obtained by: Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module
c Fitting a Vigi module on the circuit (Vigicompact)
breaker (Compact NS100 to 630) Rated current (A)
c Installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control Vigicompact NS100 to 250 N/H/L
NS400 and 630 N/H/L
unit (Compact NS630b to 3200)
c Using a Vigirex relay and separate
toroids (all Compact circuit breakers).
2
Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of distribution
systems” section.
Accompanying Vigi modules
Earth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit-breaker
terminals.
Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offering

integrated earth-leakage protection and an external
rectangular sensor
Rated current (A) 630… 3200
Compact NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1600b to 3200
NS1250 and 1600 N/H
Availability to be announced

Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers are presented in the “Protection of distribution
systems” section.
Accompanying control units Page 30
Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard.
Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relay

Vigirex Earth-leakage relay Separate toroids
Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combination

Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuit
breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or MX voltage release. Vigirex
relays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or when
there are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limited
space available, etc.).
Vigirex-relay characteristics:
c Sensitivity adjustable from 30 mA to 250 mA and eight time-delay settings (0 to 1 second)
c Closed toroids (30 to 300 mm in diameter) or split toroids (46 to 110 mm in diameter).
Options:
c Trip alarm by a fail-safe contact
c Pre-alarm LED and contact (threshold = 0.5 x I∆n)
c 400 Hz distribution systems, etc.
Compliance with standards:
c IEC 60947-2, appendix B
c French decree dated 14 November 1988
c IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to
transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system,
electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.
c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
c VDE 664, operation down to -25° C.
56
Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact)
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers

with earth-leakage protection
Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics:
c Compliance with standards
c Degree of protection, class II front-face isolation
c Positive contact indication
c Electrical characteristics
c Trip-unit characteristics
c Installation and connection modes
c Indication, measurement and control auxiliaries
c Installation and connection accessories.
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
W x H x D (mm)
3 poles
4 poles
NS100/160
105 x 236 x 86
140 x 236 x 86
NS250 NS400/630
135 x 355 x 110
180 x 355 x 110
2
Weight (kg) 3 poles 2.5 2.8 8.8
4 poles 3.2 3.4 10.8
Vigicompact NS250N
Vigi earth-leakage protection module
Compliance with standards:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 c IEC 60947-2, appendix B
c French decree dated 14 November 1988
avant test diélectrique
c IEC 60255-4 and IEC 60801-2 to 5 covering protection against nuisance
310
enlever ce couvercle
before dielectric test
remove this cover
tripping due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on
150 vigi
60 ∆t(ms)
T R NS 250 the distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference.
c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 mA
0 200 / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz
vigi MH
3 10
c VDE 664, operation down to -25° C.

N 135
1
0,3 I∆n(A)
T
HS 0,03 ( ∆t = 0 )
246
Remote indications
Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal
1 sensitivity setting tripping due to an earth fault.
2 time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection)
3 lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings Power supply
4 test button simulating an earth-fault for regular Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and
checks on the tripping function therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when
5 reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping) supplied by only two phases.
6 rating plate
7 housing for SDV auxiliary contact
Vigi module selection table
Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB
Plug-in circuit breaker Number of poles 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1)
NS100 N/H/L c c -
The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base.
NS160 N/H/L c c -
Special accessories are required (see the section NS250 N/H/L - c -
on part numbers). NS400 N/H/L - - c
NS630 N/H/L - - c
Protection characteristics
Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustable
I n (A) 0.3 0.03 - 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 0.3 - 1 - 3 - 10 - 30
Time delay
Intentional fixed adjustable adjustable
delay (ms) < 40 0 60 (2) 150 (2) 310 (2) 0 60 150 310
Max. breaking < 40 < 40 <140 <300 <800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800
time (ms)
Rated voltage 200...440 200... 440 - 440...550 200...440 - 440...550
V AC 50/60 Hz
(1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase or
two-phase protection.
(2) If the sensitivity is set to 30 mA, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting.
57
Functions Control and isolation
and characteristics Overview of solutions
Masterpact Masterpact
NW or Compact Source coupling
NW switch-disconnector Masterpact
NW or Compact
Main power
2
Main power distribution board distribution board for
for commercial applications industrial applications
15 -40 kA 20 -80 kA
1000 A 1600 A
Replacement
source
Industrial
Modular sub- distribution Automation
distribution board board cabinet
Source-
160 A : 15 - 25 kA changeover
15 - 25 kA 400 A : 20 - 80 kA system
160 A 400 A
Final distribution
Local enclosure for Local Local
isolation commercial isolation isolation
enclosure applications enclosure Control panel enclosure
10 kA 25 kA
63 A 10 kA 5 kA 5-15 kA
40 A
63 A 630 A
125 A
M M M M M
N.B. adjacent to or built into the machine
Circuit breaker-
disconnector
building utilities building final continuous processes manufacturing processes

distribution individual machines
Switch-
disconnector
standardised symbols
Switch-disconnectors
Masterpact Compact NS Interpact INS Compact NS Vario
Compact NS Interpact IN Interpact INS NG125 Multi 9
58
Compact switch-disconnectors are used to
control and isolate electrical distribution
circuits. In addition to these basic functions,
other functions for safety, remote control
and convenience include:
c Earth-leakage protection
c Auxiliary MN/MX releases
c Remote operation
c Ammeter, etc.
Compact switch-disconnectors may be
interlocked with another Compact
2
switch-disconnector or circuit breaker to
constitute a source-changeover system. Compact NS250 switch-disconnector
Compact switch-disconnector Compact switch-disconnector MN/MX

equipped with a Vigi earth- equipped with a motor mechanism voltage
leakage module release
59
Functions Control and disconnection
and characteristics NS100NA to 630NA
switch-disconnectors
Installation standards require upstream Compact switch-disconnectors

protection. However, due to their high-set Number of poles
magnetic release, Compact NS100NA to
630NA switch-disconnectors are self electric
protected. Connections fixed front connection
rear connection
rear connection
2 Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-3 and EN 60947-3

Conventional thermal current (A)
Ith
Ui
60 °C
rear connection
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp

DC
Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (2)
500/525 V
Compact NS100NA
660/690 V
DC
250 V (1 P)
500 V (2 P in series)
Short-circuit making capacity lcm (kA peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone)
maximum (with protection
circuit breaker upstream)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1s
3s
20 s
electrical AC 690 V AC 22A
440 V AC 23A
DC 250 V DC 23A
Pollution degree
Protection
Indication contacts
Voltage-presence indicator
Current-transformer module
Ammeter module
Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts)
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)
Installation
escutcheons
Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connection 2/3P
WxHxD 4P
Weight (kg) fixed, front connection 3P
4P
Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems)
Manual source-changeover systems
Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems
(1) 2P in 3P case
(2) Suitable for 480 V NEMA
60
NS100NA NS160NA NS250NA NS400NA NS630NA
2 (1), 3,4 2 (1), 3,4 2 (1), 3,4 3, 4 3, 4
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c
100
750
c
160
750
c
250
750
c
400
750
c
630
750
2
8 8 8 8 8
690 690 690 690 690
500 500 500 500 500
AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
100 100 160 160 250 250 400 400 630 630
2.6 3.6 4.9 7.1 8.5
330 330 330 330 330
1800 2500 3500 5000 6000

1800 2500 3500 5000 6000
690 960 1350 1930 2320
c c c c c
50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
50000 40000 20000 15000 15000
30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
30000 (50000 - In/2) 20000 (40000 - In/2) 10000 (20000 - In/2) 6000 (12000 - In/2) 4000 (8000 - In/2)
c c c c c
III III III III III
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
c c
105 x 161 x 86 140 x 255 x 110
140 x 161 x 86 185 x 255 x 110
1.5 to 1.8 5.2
2.0 to 2.2 6.8
c c
c c
61
Functions
and characteristics Control and disconnection
Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA
protection. Number of poles
electric
rear connection
rear connection
2 Conventional thermal current (A)

Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV)
Ith
Uimp
Ue
60 °C
Ui
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
220/240 V
380/415 V
(1)
440/480 V
500/525 V
660/690 V
Compact NS800NA DC
250 V (1 P)
500 V (2 P in series)
circuit breaker upstream) (2)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s
1s
20 s
electrical AC 690 V AC 22A/In
440 V AC 23A/In
Pollution degree
Protection
Indication contacts
Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts)
Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism)
Installation
escutcheons
WxHxD 4P
4P
Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

(2) Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker:
see additional technical information.
62
NS630bNA NS800NA NS1000NA NS1250NA NS1600NA
3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
c c c c c
630
750
8
690
800
750
8
690
1000
750
8
690
1250
750
8
690
1600
750
8
690
2
500 500 500 500 500
AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1600
630 630 800 800 1000 1000 1250 1250 1600 1520
DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A DC 22 A DC 23 A
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
50 50 50 50 50
330 330 330 330 330
25 25 25 25 25
17 17 17 17 17
4 4 4 4 4
c c c c c
10000 10000 10000 10000 10000
2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
2000 2000 2000 2000 1000
c c c c c
III III III III III
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
327 x 210 x 147
327 x 280 x 147
14
18
63
Functions Control and disconnection
and characteristics Compact NS1600b to 3200NA

protection. However, Compact NS1600b to Number of poles
3200NA switch-disconnectors are self-
protected for all currents higher than 55 kA. electric
rear connection
rear connection
2 Conventional thermal current (A)

Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV)
Ith
Uimp
Ue
60 °C
Ui
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
220/240 V
380/415 V
440/480 V (1)
500/525 V
660/690 V
Compact NS2000NA circuit breaker upstream) (2)
Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s
1s
20 s
electrical AC 690 V AC 22A/In
440 V AC 23A/In
Pollution degree
Protection
Indication contacts
Installation
Accessories escutcheons
WxHxD 4P
4P
Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic
(1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA.

(2) Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker:
see additional technical information.
64
NS1600bNA NS2000NA NS2500NA NS3200NA
3. 4 3. 4 3. 4 3. 4
c c c c
- - - -
- - - -
c c c c
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
1600
750
8
690
2000
750
8
690
2500
750
8
690
3200
750
8
690
2
500 500 500 500
AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A AC 22 A AC 23 A
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 3200 3200
115 115 115 115
187 187 187 187
40 40 40 40
28 28 28 28
4.7 4.7 4.7 4.7
c c c c
6000 6000 6000 6000
1000 1000 1000 4000
1000 1000 1000 2000
c c c c
III III III III
c
c
c
c
350 x 420 x 160
350 x 535 x 160
23
36
65
Functions Source-changeover systems
and characteristics Presentation
For complete, in-depth information, see Manual source-changeover systems

the “Interpact, Compact, Masterpact This is the most simple type. Intervention by technical personnel is required, i.e.
transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is not immediate.
source-changeover systems” catalogue.
A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to three
manually-controlled circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is
mechanical. Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, even
momentarily.
Remote-operated source-changeover systems
2 This is the most commonly employed system. No human intervention is required.

Switching from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit
breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system
(different configurations possible). Device operation is backed up by a mechanical
interlocking fixture that prevents parallel connection if the electrical system
malfunctions or if an incorrect manual operation is attempted.
Automatic source-changeover systems

An automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeover
system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes.
This solution ensures optimum energy management:
Service sector c Switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements
c Hospital operating rooms. c Management of power sources
c Safety systems for tall buildings. c Regulation
c Computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.). c Emergency source replacement, etc.
c Lighting systems in shopping centres.
The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a
supervisor.
Industry
c Assembly lines.
c Engine rooms on ships.
c Critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations.
Infrastructure
c Port and railway installations.
c Runway lighting systems.
c Control systems for military installations.
66
Manual source-changeover systems
A manual source-changeover system Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices

can be installed on two to three Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking
systems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which case
manually-operated circuit breakers or one device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position.
switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm).
mechanical. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
Interlocks prevent connection to both There are two interlocking-system models:
sources at the same time, even c Compact NS100 to 250
c Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 250).
momentarily. Devices must be either all fixed or all withdrawable.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles

The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position.
2
The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but does
allow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time.
Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
handles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with a
Compact NS630b to 1600 is not possible.
Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices
Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks
(captive keys)
Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enables
interlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that have
significantly different characteristics, for example between a low and a
medium-voltage device, or between Compact NS circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors. A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makes
possible a large number of combinations between many devices.
All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary
handles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked.
Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles Interlocking of two devices on a base plate
A base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally or
vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a
mechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip units
is not blocked.
All manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and
switch-disconnectors can be interlocked.
Devices must be fixed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection
or measurement modules.
Interlocking with keylocks
Interlocking on base plates
67
Functions Source-changeover systems
and characteristics Remote-operated systems
Source-changeover system without a controller

In this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between the
Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions must be provided
by the installation designer.
2 4
Remote-operated source-changeover system
3 2
1
Auxiliary control plate Controller

Source-changeover system with a controller
In this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under
predefined conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller.
5
6
Coupling accessory
This accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without a
controller) to facilitate connections.
Interlocking by rods Interlocking by cables
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of:

1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to
the Normal source
2 circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to
the Replacement source
3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system
using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600)
4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the
installer for NS630b to 1600. Electrical interlocking system example: part no. 51156903 in the
source-changeover system catalogue.
Switching between sources can be automated by adding:
5 ACP auxiliary control plate
6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to 1600.
Electrical system example: part no. 51156904 and 51156904 in the source-
changeover system catalogue.
Accessory:
7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to 630.
68
Controllers
When used with a remote-operated Controller BA UA

source-changeover system, the BA or UA Four-position switch
controllers initiate the automatic Automatic operation c c
Forced operation on Normal source c c
changeover operations according to
Forced operation on Replacement source c c
user-defined sequences. Stop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF) c c
Automatic operation
Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic changeover c c
Engine generator set start-up control c
Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set c
Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads
Changeover to Replacement source if one of the Normal-
source phases is absent
Test
c
c 2
By opening of the P25M circuit breaker upstream c
of the controller
By pressing the test button on the front of the controller c
Indications
Circuit-breaker status indication on the front c c
of the controller: ON, OFF, fault trip
Automatic-mode indication contact c c
Other functions
BA controller Selection of type of Normal source c
(single-phase or three-phase)
Voluntary transfer to Replacement source c c
(e.g. energy-management commands)
During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands), c
forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is
not operational
Additional control contact (not in controller). c c
Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed
(e.g. UR frequency check)
Replacement-source maximum start-up time setting c
Options
Communications option c
Power supply
Control voltages (1) 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz c c
380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz c c
440 V 60 Hz c c
Operating thresholds
Undervoltage 0.35 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un c c
UA controller Phase failure 0.5 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un c
Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un c c
Characteristics of output contacts
Rated thermal current (A) 8
Minimum load 10 mA at 12 V
AC DC
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC12 DC13
Operational current (A) 24 V 8 7 5 6 8 2
48 V 8 7 5 5 2 -
110 V 8 6 4 4 0.6 -
220/240 V 8 6 4 3 - -
250 V - - - - 0.4 -
380/415 V 5 - - - - -
440 V 4 - - - - -
660/690 V - - - - - -
(1) Power supplied by the ACP auxiliary control plate. The supply voltage must be the same for
the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the
same as the distribution-system voltage, the Normal and Replacement sources can be used
directly for the power supply. If not, a BC-type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used.
69
Functions and Communication
Integration of the circuit breaker or the There are two possibilities for the 100 to 630 A range:
switch-disconnector in a supervison system Communicating auxiliaries
requires either the communicating They replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus.
Three equipment levels:
auxiliaries or the SC150 interface. Compact Communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising:
devices fit perfectly in the SMS Powerlogic - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
electrical installation management system - Electronic module
by communicating using Digipact protocols. - Prefabricated wiring.
Communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising:
An external gateway offers communication - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts
2 via other networks including:

Profibus
Ethernet
- Motor-mechanism module (220 V AC) (1)
- Electronic module
- Prefabricated wiring.
Communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising:
- CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts
- Electronic module
- Wiring connector.
SC150 interface
Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with non-
communicating auxiliaries into a supervison system.
The SC150 interface is used to connect:
The auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE)
The remote-operation system (on, off, reset)
The communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic trip
units equipped with the COM option
An unassigned digital input.
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts

and motor-mechanism module
Withdrawable Compact NS on its chassis equipped with

communicating auxiliary contacts
SC150 indication and control interface
(1) For voltages other than 220 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (non-
communicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface.
70
Overview of functions
Software
Communication
RS 232C,Ethernet
interface
RS 485
Communication
Bus 2
Data concentrator
DC150
Device
SC150 indication and

control interface
Digipact Bus Compact NS with

communicating Compact circuit breaker with standard
auxiliary contacts auxiliary contacts and motor mechanism.
and motor mechanism Trip unit with the COM option.
: hard wire
: communication bus Compact with
communicating SC150
auxiliaries
Device identification
Address c c
Rating - -
Indication of status conditions
OF (on/off) c c
SD (trip indication) c c
SDE (fault-trip indication) c c
CE/CD (connected/disconnected position) c c
Controls
ON/OFF c c
LED reset c c
Protection settings
Reading of the protection settings c
Operating and maintenance aids
Measurements: currents c
Fault readings: type of fault c
Indications: operation counter c c
71
characteristics Compact NS630b to 1600
COM option in Compact
The COM option is required for integration For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
in a supervision system. and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually
operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices)
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.
communications protocol for full For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
electrical-installation management systems. and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually
An external gateway is available for operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices)
and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module.
2 communication on other networks:

c Profibus
c Ethernet…
c A "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors
(CE, CD and CT contacts).
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication
contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
Digipact "device" Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module
communication module.
This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
unit and the communication module.
Consumption: 30 mA, 24 V.
Digipact or Modbus "chassis" communication module
This module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis"
communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain
the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position.
Communicating motor-mechanism module
A bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker.
A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used.
The remote-tripping function (MX or MN) is independent of the communication option.
Digipact "chassis"
communication module
Communication Communication
bus bus
OF
SD OF
SDE SDE
3 3
1 1 5
Modbus "device"
communication module
Manually operated Electrically operated

fixed device fixed device
Communication Communication
bus bus
2 2
4 4
CT CT
CE CE
CD OF CD
Modbus "chassis" OF
SD SDE
communication module SDE 3
3
1 5
1

drawout device drawout device
1 "device" communication module 4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors

2 "chassis" communication module 5 communicating motor-mechanism module
3 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
72
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option.
File Edit View Setup Control Display Reports Tools Window Help
Sampling Mode : MANUAL 5 seconds
Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option.
Time Event Module The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis
c Identify the device
c Indicate status conditions
Phase 1-N
1,20
c Control the device.

Harmonics(RMS)
Fundamental: H1: 118.09

H2: 0.01
1,00 H3: 0.45
RMS: H4: 0.03
RMS-H:
H5: 0.45
H6: 0.04
H7: 1.27
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option
0,80 Peak: H8: 0.05
CF:
H9: 0.42
H10: 0.01 also offers:
c Setting of the protections functions
H11: 1.03
THD: H12: 0.07
0,60
c Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and

2
OK
0,40
maintenance purposes
0,20
0,00
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12
switch-disconnector with circuit breaker with
Harmonics
communication bus communication bus
ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30
Ready Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
device identification
address c - AZSS A S AZA
rating - - A AZ A
type of device - -
type of control unit - - A AZA
type of long-time rating plug - - A AZ A
status indications
OF (on/off) c - S A AZA
SD (trip indication) c - S A AZ A
SDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A AZ A
CE/CD (connected/ c - S A AZ A
disconnected position)
controls
MX/XF ON/OFF - - S A AZA
spring charging - -
reset of the mechanical - - AZ
indicator
protections settings
reading of protections settings A AZA
operating and maintenance aids
measurements
current A AZA
fault readings
type of fault AZA
Note.
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.
73
characteristics Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Compact in a communication network
Software
Communication
RS 232C,Ethernet
interface
RS 485
2 Communication
Bus
Data concentrator
DC150
Device
Digipact Bus Modbus Bus
Compact Compact
Devices
Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either
a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available
depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (S, A) and on the type of
communication bus (Digipact or Modbus).
Switch-disconnectors may be connected exclusively to the Digipact communication
bus.
Communication bus
Digipact
The Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the
Digipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM,
PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data
concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue).
Addresses
Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator.
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is
calculated in terms of “communication points”. These points correspond to the
amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various
devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100.
If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact
internal bus.
Communicating device Number of points
DC150 data concentrator 4
Micrologic + Digipact COM 4
PM150 4
SC150 4
UA150 4
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 200 meters.
Bus power source
Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (24 V)..
74
Modbus
The Modbus RS485 (JBus) system is an open bus on which communicating
Modbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are
installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus.
Addresses
The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 255 addresses (1 to 255).
The “device” communication module comprises three addresses linked to:
Circuit-breaker manager;
Measurement manager;
Protection manager.
The “chassis” communication module comprises one address linked to:
The chassis manager.
The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the
supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators.
2
The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker address
@xx entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47).
logic addresses
@xx Circuit-breaker manager (1 to 47)
@xx + 50 Chassis manager (51 to 97)
@xx + 200 Measurement managers (201 to 247)
@xx + 100 Protection manager (101 to 147)
Number of devices
The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus
depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam,
Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (19200 is recommended), the volume of data
exchanged and the desired response time. The RS485 physical layer offers up to
32 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves).
A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the
device).
A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the
device and on the chassis).
The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices.
Length of bus
The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 1200 meters.
Bus power source
A 24 V DC power supply is required (less than 20% ripple, insulation class II).
Communication interface
The Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of
three manners:
Direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is
equipped with a Modbus port;
Direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS485) / Serial port (RS232)
communication interface is required;
Connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS485) / TCP/IP
(Ethernet) communication interface is required.
Software
To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software
with a Modbus driver must be used.
Micrologic utilities
This is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to:
Display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the DDS (Data Display Software)
application;
Read/write the settings with the RSS (Remote Setting Software) application;
Remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the CSS (Control Command
Software) application.
This software is available on request.
System Manager Software (SMS)

SMS is power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MV
electrical installations.
The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, from
standalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings.
SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installation
including:
c Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products
c LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
c Sepam units.
75
characteristics Compact NS1600b to 3200
COM option in Compact
The COM option is required for integration For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of:
of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit
and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts).
in a supervision system.
Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker
Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus
indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses.
communications protocol for full Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module
compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information
electrical-installation management systems. on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control
An external gateway is available for unit and the communication module.
2 communication on other networks:

c Profibus
c Ethernet… Bus de
communication
Digipact "device"
communication module.
OF
SD
SDE
2
Boîtier
COM
Modbus "device"
communication module 1 "Device" communication module
2 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors
76
POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option.
File Edit View Setup Control Display Reports Tools Window Help
Sampling Mode : MANUAL 5 seconds
Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option.
Time Event Module The COM option may be used with all types of control units to:
Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis
c Identify the device
c Indicate status conditions
Phase 1-N
1,20
c Control the device.

Harmonics(RMS)
Fundamental: H1: 118.09

H2: 0.01
1,00 H3: 0.45
RMS: H4: 0.03
RMS-H:
H5: 0.45
H6: 0.04
H7: 1.27
Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option
0,80 Peak: H8: 0.05
CF:
H9: 0.42
H10: 0.01 also offers:
c Setting of the protections functions
H11: 1.03
THD: H12: 0.07
0,60
c Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and

2
OK
0,40
maintenance purposes
0,20
0,00
H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12
switch-disconnector with circuit breaker with
Harmonics
communication bus communication bus
ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30
Ready Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus
device identification
address c - AZSS A S AZA
rating - - A AZ A
type of device - -
type of control unit - - A AZA
type of long-time rating plug - - A AZ A
status indications
OF (on/off) c - S A AZA
SD (trip indication) c - S A AZ A
SDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A AZ A
protections settings
reading of protections settings A AZA
operating and maintenance aids
measurements
current A AZA
fault readings
type of fault AZA
Note.
See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection.
77
Functions Installation, connection
and characteristics and accessories
Compact NS80H-MA
Sealable terminal
shield
2
Direct rotary
handle
Auxiliary
contact
DIN-rail
plate
Voltage release
Sealable terminal Extended rotary

shield handle
Auxiliary
contact
78
Compact NSC100N
Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout)
45 mm front
2
Sealable terminal
shield
Auxiliary
contact
Voltage release Extended rotary

handle
Sealable terminal
shield
79
Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N
Installation
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically,
horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are
designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market
and country.
Mounting on a DIN rail is possible using a special adapter.
These three circuit breakers are available in the fixed, front-connection version.
Installation positions
2
NS80H-MA and NSC100N: NS80H-MA and NSC100N: Standard 45 mm front,
mounting on backplate or mounting on DIN rail optional on NSC100N.
mounting plate. (optional).
Front connection of bare cables

Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N circuit breakers are
equipped as standard with connectors for bare copper
or aluminium cables from 1.5 to 70 mm2.
Distribution connector
This connector screws directly to the standard
connectors. It is used to connect up to three cables:
c Flexible cables from 1 to 10 mm2 Distribution connector
c Rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm2
c With crimped or self-crimping ferrules from
1.5 to 4 mm2.
Insulation of live parts

Terminal shields
Insulating accessories used for protection against
direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection
IP 40). They are supplied with sealing accessories.
For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory.
Terminal shields
80
Indication contacts
A single type of contact, complying with the IEC 60947-5 international
recommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it is
inserted in the device.
c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
c SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v An overload
v A short-circuit
v Operation of a voltage release.
Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
Indication contacts
Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuit-

breaker status information. They can be used for indications,
All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in “low-level” versions capable of
switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits).
2
electrical locking, relaying, etc. Characteristics
Contacts Standard Low level
Rated thermal current (A) 6 5
Minimum load 10 mA at 24 V 1 mA at 4 V
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a
tripping threshold:
c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
c Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the
rated voltage.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
IEC 60947-2.
MX or MN voltage release
Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA)
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting i 200 ms :
It is used in conjunction with:
c A 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
c A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be
reset locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
c Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
c The releases clip in behind the front cover
c Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2 to integrated terminal blocks.
Electrical characteristics
c Consumption:
v Pick-up (MX): < 30 VA
v Seal-in (MN): < 5 VA
c Response time: < 50 ms.
81
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N(cont.)
Rotary handles
There are two types of rotary handle:
c Direct rotary handle
c Extended rotary handle.
There are two models:
c Standard with a black handle
c VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control.
Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N)
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
2 Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle

The direct rotary handle maintains:
c Visibility of and access to trip unit settings
c Suitability for isolation
c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped
c Access to the “push to trip” button
c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks,
shackle diameter Ø 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover.
Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations:
c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards:
v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open
c A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP 54, IK08.
Extended rotary handle
Degree of protection IP 55, IK08.
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
switchboards, from the switchboard front.
It maintains:
c Access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open
Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked.
The extended rotary handle is made up of:
c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws)
c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance
between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm).
82
Locking systems
Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC 60947-2.
Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters
ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied).
2
Toggle locking using a removable device
Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for hand-
written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels (part number AB1-** (8 digits).
Identification accessories
83
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version)
Sealable terminal
shield
Voltage-presence
indicator
2
Rear connector
Connectors
One-piece
spreader
Interphase barriers
Motor-mechanism
Direct rotary module
handle
Rear insulating
screens Auxiliary contact
Extended rotary
handle
Voltage release
Ammeter module
Current-transformer
module
Insulation-monitoring
module
Trip unit
Sealable terminal
shield
84
Compact NS100 to 630
(plug-in and withdrawable versions)
Sealable terminal
shield
Voltage-presence
indicator
2
Terminal extensions and spreaders
Rear connectors
Connectors for
withdrawable One-piece Connectors
devices spreader
Interphase barriers
Plug-in base
Chassis side Control-wire

plate connection
plate Motor-mechanism
Direct rotary module
handle
Auxiliary contact
Extended rotary
handle
Circuit-breaker
side plate Voltage release
Control-wire
connection
on chassis
Ammeter module
Insulation-monitoring
module
Trip unit
Sealable terminal
shield
85
Installation
Fixed circuit breakers
Compact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their
back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation
in the various types of switchboards of each market and country.
2 Fixed Compact NS250H
Mounting on a backplate Mounting on rails Mounting on DIN rail (with

(solid or slotted) adapter)
Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate.
Circuit breaker on a plug-in base

The plug-in configuration makes it possible
to:
c Extract and/or rapidly replace the
circuit breaker without having to touch
connections
c Allow for the addition of future circuits
at a later date.
Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a front Mounting on rails

panel
Protection against direct contacts with power circuits

c Circuit breaker plugged in = IP4
c Circuit breaker removed = IP2.
c Circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4
Parts of a plug-in configuration
c Compact circuit breaker
Compact NS250H on a plug-in base c Set of power connectors added to the circuit breaker
c Plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on rails
c Insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate
with front connections
c Safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the
circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip does
not prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed.
c Mandatory short terminal shields.
Installation positions Accessories
Insulating accessories can be used to:
c Protect against direct contact
c Increase insulation between phases.
86
c Disconnected position - the power Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis
circuits are disconnected, but the
circuit breaker is still on the chassis
and may still be operated (ON, OFF,
push-to-trip).
c The circuit breaker may be locked Connected Disconnected Removed
using 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle
The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other
diameter 5 to 8 mm), to prevent plates mounted on the circuit breaker.
connection.
c The auxiliaries can be tested (with
manual auxiliary connector).
Accessories
c Auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the “connected”
and “disconnected” positions
c Toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel,
2
intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the
circuit breaker (supplied with a toggle extension)
c Keylock which, depending on the bolt fitted, can be used to:
v Prevent insertion for connection
v Lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions.
c Telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles.
Compact NS250H on a withdrawable chassis
Front and rear connections

Fixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with front
and rear connections.
Fixed device
Front connection Rear connection
Plug-in and withdrawable devices
Front connection Rear connection Rear connection through

a backplate
87
Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Connection of fixed devices

Front connection of bars or cables
Right-angle terminal
with lugs extensions
The Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equipped
as standard with terminals comprising snap-in nuts
with screws (M8 for NS100 to 250, M10 for NS400 to
630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cables
with lugs.
2 Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise,

spreaders) are available for all connection
requirements. Spreaders (52.5 or 70 mm pitch) may
be fitted on the Compact NS400 to 630.
Straight terminal extensions
for NS100 to 250
Lugs
Lugs are different for copper and aluminium cables.
They are supplied with interphase barriers and are
compatible with the long terminal shields.
c The small lugs for copper cables may be used for
cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
v 120, 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250) Edgewise terminal
v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630). extensions for NS400 to 630
Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching.
c The small lugs for aluminium cables may be used
for cables with the following cross-sectional areas:
v 150 or 185 mm2 (NS100 to 250)
v 240 or 300 mm2 (NS400 to 630).
Crimping by hexagonal barrels.
Spreaders
Spreaders increase the pitch of the terminals. Small lug for copper cables
They are not compatible with terminal shields on the
Compact NS100 to 250.
The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thus
making it possible to use the connection accessories
of a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 250 can
be fitted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to
630). The one-piece spreader also provides protection
against direct contact (see page 91). Small lug for aluminium
cables
Spreaders
One-piece spreader
88
Front connection of bare cables
Bare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices may
be used for both copper and aluminium cables.
1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 1-cable connector
The connectors snap directly on to the device for NS100 to 250
terminals or clip onto right-angle and straight terminal
extensions as well as spreaders.
1-cable and 2-cable connectors for Compact
NS400 to 630 1-cable connector
The connectors are screwed to device terminals or
2
for NS400 to 630
right-angle terminal extensions.
Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 250
These connectors are screwed directly to device
terminals. Interphase barriers are supplied with
distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long
terminal shields. Each connector can receive six
2-cable connector
cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to for NS400 to 630
35 mm2 each.
Polybloc distribution block for Compact NS100 to 630
The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminals
and is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid
cables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding
10 mm2 , to each pole. Connection is made to spring
terminals without screws.
for NS100 to 250
Polybloc distribution block

for NS100 to 250
Rear connection
Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are
available in two lengths. Bars may be positioned flat,
on edge or at 45° angles depending on how the rear
connections are positioned.
The rear connections are simply fitted to the device Two lengths
connection terminals. All combinations of rear
connection lengths and positions are possible on a
given device. The device is mounted on a backplate.
For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cable
connectors for Compact NS100 to 250 may be simply
clipped onto the rear connections.
Four positions
Connection
of bare cables
to NS100 to 250.
89
Connection of plug-in devices

Connection of bars or cables with lugs
The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation,
serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on a
backplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal
extensions.
For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 52.5 or 70 mm
pitch spreaders.
2 Connection accessories
See the “Connection of fixed devices” section.
Front connection Front connection with Rear connection

spreaders
Rear connection of a base

mounted on a backplate
Connection of bare cables

All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the “Connection of
fixed devices” section.
Plug-in base for Compact Plug-in base for Compact

NS100 to 250 equipped with NS400 to 630 equipped with
1-cable connectors 2-cable connectors
90
One-piece spreader
Connection of large cables may require an increase in
the distance between the device terminals. The one-
piece spreader is an accessory that can also be fitted
on Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers the
following features:
c Increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals
to correspond to that of the next largest frame
size.
c Compatible with all the connection accessories
One-piece spreader
available for the next largest frame size
(connectors, terminal extensions, etc.)
c Enhances insulation between phases in
2
comparison with standard spreaders.
NS100 to 250 NS400 to 630
Pitch without 35 45
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with standard 45 52.5 or 70
spreaders (mm)
Pitch with one-piece 45 70
spreader (mm)
Mounting
When equipped with a one-piece spreader, Compact
NS circuit breakers may be installed either at the back
of a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser.
c Devices with different frame sizes can thus be
aligned in the switchboard
c The same mounting plate can be used for all
devices (including Interpact INS
switch-disconnectors).
Connection and insulation

accessories are identical to
those for Interpact INS
Mounting at the back of a Mounting behind the front

switchboard panel with a raiser
91

Terminal shields
Terminal shields are sealable insulating accessories
used for protection against direct contact with power
circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are
supplied with sealing accessories.
Terminal-shield selection
c Fixed circuit breaker, front connection - long
2 terminal shields
c Fixed circuit breaker, rear connection - short
terminal shields.
c For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are
Terminal shields
mandatory.
c For voltages > 600 V, special connection kit with
terminal shields and insulating screens
Compact NS equipped with terminal shields. c For Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders,
special terminal shields for spreaders
c For withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and
chassis type), short terminal shields on the device
are mandatory. Terminal shields on the base are
possible.
Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to:
c Protect against direct contact with power circuits
(degree of protection IP40, IK07)
c increase insulation between phases.
Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include: Interphase barriers
c An adapter offering the same connection
possibilities as the circuit breaker
c Long terminal shields for the plug-in base.
Interphase barriers
Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the
power-connection points:
c They clip easily onto the circuit breaker
c Not compatible with terminal shields
c Special version for plug-in bases.
Rear insulating screens

Safety accessories for insulation between connections
and the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields or
interphase barriers.
Rear insulating screens
92
OF1 SD SDE OF2
Connection of electrical auxiliaries
Fixed configuration
MN/MX motor mechanism
OR Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover.
rotary handle
SDV
Compact NS100/160/250
2
OF1 OF2 OF3 SD SDE
Plug-in and withdrawable configurations
MN/MX motor mechanism

OR
rotary handle
SDV
Automatic auxiliary connectors

Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary
connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of:
c A moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per
circuit breaker)
c A fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare
cables up to 2.5 mm2.
Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors.
For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unit
STR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors.
connector 2 connector 3
connector 1 OF2/SDV OF3/SDV
connector 2 COM
OF1 SDE/MT connector 1 OF2
SD MT T
OF1 SDE/MT
MN/MX SD MT
MN/MX
Compact NS100 to 250 Compact NS400 to 630
Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable configurations

Withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine
wires each. In “disconnected” position, the auxiliaries remain connected and can
therefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker.
Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with Nine-wire manual auxiliary
numbered terminals for connection of wires up to: connector
c 1.5 mm2 for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases
c 2.5 mm2 for the motor-mechanism module.
93
Indication contacts
Common-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status
information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
They comply with the IEC 60947-5 international recommendation.
Functions
c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts
v An overload
v A short-circuit
v An earth-leakage fault
2 Changeover contacts v Operation of a voltage release

v Operation of the “push to trip” button
v Disconnection when the device is ON.
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available
c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
in “low-level” versions capable of switching very low
v An overload
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic
v A short-circuit
circuits).
v An earth-leakage fault.
c SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has
tripped due to an earth fault.
c CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary
handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early
break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early
make).
c CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriage
switches for withdrawable circuit breakers
Installation
c OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these
different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device.
The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi
module for the SDV function).
The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit
requires the SDE actuator.
c CAM function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended).
c CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be fitted on the
fixed and moving parts of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts
Utilisation cat. (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
94
Rotary handles
Direct rotary handle

Compact NS250L with a direct rotary handle
Degree of protection IP40, IK07.
2
c Access to the “push to trip” button
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied).
v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON
v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open
c A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07)
c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP54, IK08.

Compact NS250L with an extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP 55, IK08.
This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
It maintains:
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally
c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max
distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is:
v 185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 250
v 210 to 625 mm for Compact NS400 to 630.
For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a
telescopic shaft with two stable positions.
95
Remote tripping
MX or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker.
This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a
tripping threshold:
c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage
c Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the
rated voltage.
Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard
2 MX or MN voltage release IEC 60947-2.

Time-delay unit for an MN release
Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 200 ms.
It is used in conjunction with:
c A 250 V DC MN release, control voltage 220/240 V AC
c A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC.
MX shunt release
Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un.
Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 20 ms) or maintained.
Operation
When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or MX release, it must be
reset locally.
MN or MX tripping takes priority over manual closing.
In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary,
is not possible.
Mechanical characteristics
c Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker
c The releases clip in behind the front cover
c Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm2, to integrated terminal blocks.
c Consumption:
v Pick-up (MX): < 10 VA
v Seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA.
c Response time: < 50 ms.
96
Motor-mechanism module
When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakers
feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation:
c All circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible,
including trip-unit settings and indications;
c Suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible;
c Double insulation of the front face.
Applications
c Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution
control
c Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to
optimise energy costs
c Load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costs
2
Compact NS250H with motor mechanism c Synchrocoupling.
Automatic operation
c Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained
1 2 3 4 5 6 control signals
c Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or MX),
with standard wiring
c Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault.
compact
Manual operation
NS400 H
Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV.
Ue Icu
2 c Transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode
(V)
220/240
(kA)
100
indication
c Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by 2 pushbuttons
380/415 70
440 65
500/525 50
c Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 times

600/690 20
cat A
c Padlocking in OFF position.
O OFF charged
Ics = 100% Icu
IEC 947-2
Installation and connection
UTE VDE BS CEI
UNE NEMA
In = 400A All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are
maintained.
Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to
manu auto O I 1 integrated terminals, for cables up to 2.5 mm2.
push OFF push ON
Accessories
c Keylock for locking in OFF position
c Operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number
of ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motor-
10 9 8 7 mechanism module.
Characteristics
1 contact position indicator (suitability for isolation) Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630
2 outgoing-circuit identification labels Response time (ms) opening < 600
3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged) closing < 80
4 locking device (keylock) Rate cycles/minute max. 4
5 locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, Control voltage (V) DC 24/30 - 48/60
shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied 110/130 - 250
6 manual spring-charging lever AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130
7 I (ON) pushbutton 220/240 - 380/440
8 O (OFF) pushbutton Consumption (1) DC (W) opening i 500
9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this closing i 500
switch can be indicated remotely AC (VA) opening i 500
10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630) closing i 500
Electrical endurance
Circuit breaker + motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations
(IEC 60947-2), at 440 V.
50
40
30 NS100
20 NS160
15
10 NS250
6 NS400
4 NS630
(1) For NS100/250, motor "vibratory" type consider inrush
current as 2 In during 10 ms cycling. 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 I/In
97
Indications and measurement

Voltage presence indicator
The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with
power.
Installation
c In the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts
c Not compatible with the motor-mechanism module
c Upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker
2 c Degree of protection IP40, IK04.

Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 220 to 550 V AC.
This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an
ammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied).
Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator Installation
c Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals
c Degree of protection IP40, IK04
c Class II insulation between front and the power circuits
c Connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to 2.5 mm2 .
c Transformer with 5 A secondary winding.
c Accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions:
v Rating 100 A: 1.6 VA
v Rating 150 A: 3 VA
v Rating 250 A: 5 VA
v Rating 400/630A: 8 VA.
Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules

Ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of
phases by 3-position switch in front).
Imax ammeter module
Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in the
middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front.
Installation
Compact NS630H with current-transformer module c Identical for both types of ammeter module
c Ammeter clips into module in any of four 90° positions, i.e. can be installed of
devices mounted both vertically and horizontally
c Degree of protection IP40, IK04
c Class II insulation between front and the power circuits.
c Ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5
c Imax ammeter module:
v Accuracy ± 6 %
v Maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes.
Compact NS250L with ammeter module
98
This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT
systems).
Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping.
Indication by a red LED in front.
An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications.
Installation
c Degree of protection: IP40, IK04
c Double insulation of the front face.
c Settings: 100, 200, 500 and 1000 mA
c Accuracy: -50 +0%
2
c Time delay following drop: 5 to 10 seconds
c AC-system voltage: 200 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC.
Compact NS250H with insulation-monitoring module
Communication
Communicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanism
module also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simply
replace the standard electrical auxiliaries.
Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COM
communications option, it is possible to transmit data to Digipact modules:
c Settings
c Rms values of phase and neutral currents
c Current of the most heavily loaded phase
c Overload alarm in progress
c Tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.).
Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts
and motor-mechanism module
Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicating

auxiliary contacts
99
Locking systems
Control device Function Means Required
accessories
Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device
lock in OFF or padlock fixed device
ON position
2
Direct rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
keylock locking
device + keylock
MCC rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, keylock keylock
door opening prevented
Motor mechanism lock in OFF position, padlock
motor mechanism keylock locking device
locked out (keylock incorporated)
Locking of the toggle using a Locking of the toggle using a Locking of the rotary handle
removable device fixed device using a padlock or a keylock.
100
Individual enclosures
Compact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may be
installed in individual enclosures.
All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminal
extensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Interpact
Compact and Vigicompact NS250 to 630 devices.
There are two models of enclosures:
c Heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with:
v Metal enclosure
v Door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle
v Direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP 55, IK 08)
v Device mounting plate
v Removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom.
2
c Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with:
v Insulating enclosure
v Transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handle
v Extended rotary handle
v Device mounting plate
v Removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top.
Dimensions (W x H x D in mm)
c Metal enclosures: W D
Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS v Compact NS100 to 160: 300 x 400 x 200
v Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 400 x 500 x 200
v Compact NS250 to 400: 400 x 600 x 200
v Compact NS630: 600 x 800 x 275
c Insulating enclosures: H
v Compact/Vigicompact NS100 to 160:270 x 360 x 235
v Compact NS250: 270 x 540 x 235
v Compact NS400 to 630: 360 x 720 x 235
101
Escutcheons
Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the
switchboard door. They increase the degree of
protection to at least IP40, IK07.
Front-panel escutcheons for Toggle cover Front-panel escutcheon for

toggle and Vigi module c degree of protection rotary handle.
(NSA160). Secures to the IP43, IK07 Secures to the panel by four
panel, from the front. c fits on the front of the screws, from the front.
circuit breaker. For circuit breaker with motor
mechanism and Vigi module,
use the protection collar for
front panel mounting (see
below).
Front-panel escutcheons for

ammeter module. Secures to
the panel by four screws,
from the front.
Protection collar for toggle and Vigi

module on withdrawable devices
Protection collars maintain the degree of protection,
whatever the position of the device (connected,
disconnected).
c Front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as
those for rotary handles and ammeter modules).
c Collars are mounted on the device using two
screws.
c Escutcheons are attached to the switchboard.
c A toggle extension is supplied with the collar.
For the insulation-monitoring module, use the same
elements as for the Vigi module.
Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism,
rotary handles, ammeter modules
Same as for fixed devices.
102
Outgoing-circuit identification
Compact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications.
It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-** :
v Compact NS100 to 250: 8 digits
v Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits.
2
Identification accessories
Sealing accessories
This option includes the elements required to fit lead seals to prevent:
c Front removal
c Rotary-handle removal
c Opening of the motor-mechanism module
c Access to auxiliaries
c Access to trip-unit settings
c Trip-unit removal
c Access to earth-leakage protection settings
c Terminal-shield removal
c Access to power connections.
Sealing accessories
103
(fixed version)
Sealable terminal
shield
2
Connection kit
for connectors Vertical connection
adapter
Auxiliary contact
Voltage release
Manual control with

front connection
Manual control with

rear connection
Direct rotary
handle
Electrical control with
mixed connection
Extended rotary
handle
Communications
module
Connection kit
for connectors
Sealable terminal
shield
Escutcheon
104
(withdrawable version)
Vertical connection
adapter 2
Auxiliary contact
Voltage release
Manual operation
Direct rotary
Electrical operation handle
Communications
module Extended rotary
handle
Escutcheon Transparent cover
105
Installation
Fixed configuration
Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontally
or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics.
2
Fixed Compact NS800H
Mounting on a backplate Mounting on rails
The withdrawable configuration makes it Withdrawable configuration

possible to: Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
c Extract and/or rapidly replace the
circuit breaker without having to touch
connections;
c Allow for the addition of future circuits
at a later date.
Mounting on a backplate Rear mounting on rails
Withdrawable Compact NS800H
Device on mounting plate Device on rails
106
The device may be in one of four positions
on the chassis:
c Connected position. The power
circuits and auxiliary contacts are all
connected Connected Test Disconnected Removed
c Test position. The power circuits are
The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularly
disconnected. The auxiliary contacts
suited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include:
are still connected and the device can c Device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be
be operated electrically
c Disconnected position. The power
circuits and auxiliary contacts are all
stored in the chassis
c Three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated:
v Locally by a position indicator
v Remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, 2 for the
2
disconnected, however the device is disconnected position and 1 for the test position)
still mounted on the chassis. It can be c Circuit-breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel.
operated manually (ON, OFF, "push to Locking
trip"). There are extensive locking possibilities:
c Chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three
c Removed position. All circuits are
padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panel
disconnected. The device simply rests c Door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position)
on the chassis rails and can be c Racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open)
removed. c Locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during
device connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requires
pressing a release button to free the crank.
Other safety function
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics.
4
5
6
7
8
1
9
10
2
1 mismatch protection
2 door interlock
3 racking interlock
4 keylock locking
5 padlock locking
6 position indicator
7 chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed)
8 crank entry
9 reset button
10 crank storage
107
Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.)
Compact NS630b to 1600 fixed and Types of connection

withdrawable devices can be connected
using: Front connection
c Horizontal or vertical rear connections
c Front connections
c Mixed connections
c A combination of front and rear
connections.
2
Rear connection
Horizontal Vertical
Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90° to make it a vertical connector.
Combination of front and rear connections
Note.
Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with
bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors,
requiring no particular treatment.
108
Front connection of fixed devices
Bars
Fixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
devices are equipped with terminals comprising
captive screws for direct connection of bars.
Other connection possibilities for bars include
vertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars and
spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. Vertical-connection adapters
2
If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented,
then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in
order to comply with the safety clearances.
Spreaders.
Bare cables
Special sets of connectors and terminal shields may
be used to connect up to four 240 mm2 copper or
aluminium cables for each phase.
4-cable connectors
Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters are combined with the
vertical-connection adapters.
One to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm2 )
may be connected.
To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned
between the terminal extensions. Cable lug adapters
If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top of
the arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to install
the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety
clearances.
109
Rear connection of fixed devices

Bars
Fixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600
devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors
may be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars,
depending on the position of the connectors.
Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to
95 mm. Spreaders.
Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four
cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm2).
between the terminal extensions.
Cable lug adapters
110
Front connection of withdrawable devices
Bars
Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to
1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars.
Other connection possibilities for bars include
vertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars and
spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm.
Vertical-connection adapters
2
Spreaders
Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters
111
Rear connection of withdrawable devices

Bars
Withdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to
1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical
connectors may be directly connected to flat or
edge-wise bars, depending on the position of the
connectors. Spreaders are available to increase the
pole pitch to 95 mm. Spreaders
Cables with lugs

Cable lug adapters
112
Connection shield
Mounted on fixed, front-connection devices, this shield
insulates power-connection points, particularly when
cables with lugs are used
Interphase barriers
Connection shield
2
These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to
reinforce isolation of connection points in installations
with busbars, whether insulated or not.
Barriers are installed vertically between front or rear
connection terminals.
Interphase barriers for fixed

Compact NS equipped with connection shield device, front connection
Interphase barriers for fixed

device, rear connection
Interphase barriers for

withdrawable device, rear
connection
Safety shutters
Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters
automatically block access to the disconnecting
contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected
or test positions (degree of protection IP 20). When
the device is removed from its chassis, no live parts
are accessible.
The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied) Safety shutters
to:
c Prevent connection of the device
c Lock the shutters in the closed position.
113
Connection of electrical auxiliaries

Fixed devices
Connections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed.
OF1 Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top.
OF2
OF3
rotary handle
SD
COM MN
2 or
MX
Manually operated device
MN
Withdrawable devices
ou
or Auxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of the
COM MX
chassis.
The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fixed and moving part. The two parts
are in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions.
Electrically operated device
Withdrawable device
114
Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
Functions
c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
v An overload
OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts
v A short-circuit
v Operation of a voltage release
2
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available v Operation of the "push to trip" button
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low v Disconnection when the device is ON.
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
circuits). c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
v An overload
v A short-circuit
c CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the
rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices
(early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing
(early make).
Installation
c OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The
contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
c CAF / CAO function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or
extended).
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switches

A single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis to
indicate, depending on the slot where it is installed:
c The connected (CE) position
c The disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required
clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached
c The test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and
the auxiliary circuits are connected.
Installation
c Contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions
clip into the upper front section of the chassis.
Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts
Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and
test (CT) positions
Operational 24 V 8 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 8 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 8 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 8 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 8 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
115
Rotary handles

2 Degree of protection IP 40, IK 07.
Compact NS with a direct rotary handle c Suitability for isolation
c Access to the "push to trip" button
v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON;
v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open;
c A higher degree of protection (IP 43, IK 07)
c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E03.81.501, IP 54, IK 07.

Degree of protection IP 55, IK 07.
Compact NS with an extended rotary handle This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of
It maintains:
same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally.
c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max
distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is 218/605 mm.
116
Manually operated circuit breakers may be Remote tripping
equipped with an MX shunt release, an MN This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of a
undervoltage release or a delayed shunt release (MX), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltage
undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). release (MN + delay unit).
Electrically operated circuit breakers are The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit
equipped as standard with a remote breaker.
operating mechanism to remotely open Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
or close the circuit breaker. An MX shunt
release or an MN undervoltage release
(instantaneous or delayed) may be
added.
opening
order
opening
order
ordre de
déclenchement
retardé 10 12
2
MX voltage release
retardateur
3 6
ordre de
C2 D2 déclenchement
instantané D2
MX MN MN
C1 D1 D1
Voltage releases (MX)

When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250- 240/277- 380/480- 500/550
V DC 1- 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250
Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un
Continuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200
hold: 4.5
Circuit-breaker response 50 ms±10
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is not
supplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-
breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to
85% of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 - 500/550
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200 - hold: 4.5
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3s
time at Un non-adjustable 0.25s
117
Electrically operated circuit breakers are Electrically operated circuit breaker

equipped as standard with a motor The motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuit
mechanism module. breaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening release
Two solutions are available for electrical and a closing release.
operation: An electrical operation function is generally combined with:
c Device ON/OFF indication (OF)
c An analogue solution
c "Fault-trip" indication (SDE).
c A digital solution with the COM
Wiring diagram of an analogue electrical operation solution
communication option.
2 opening closing fault open closed

order order
A4 A2 B4 82 84 12 14
electrical OF1
operation
SDE
A1 81 11
Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker

Wiring diagram of a digital electrical operation solution
opening closing
order order
A4 A2 B4
remote-operating
mechanism
A1
COM
supervisor
OF
SDE
In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, the

mechanism discharges without any movement of the main
contacts.
In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the
standard electrical operation solution provides an anti-
pumping function by blocking the main contacts in open
position.
118
Spring-charging motor
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/240 - 277- 380/415 - 400/440 - 480
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/125 - 200/250
Consumption (VA or W) 180
Motor overcurrent 2 to 3 In for 0.1 second
Charging time maximum 4 seconds
Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute
Electrical closing order
The release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above), except that the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and the
circuit-breaker response time at Un is 60 ms ± 10.
The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement a
2
synchro-coupling system.
Electrical opening order
The release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supply
can be maintained or automatically disconnected.
Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an MX release (see
above).
119
Toggle locked by removable Locking on manually operated devices

padlocking device
accessories
lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device
position
2 Rotary handle locked by a

keylock
CNOMO direct rotary handle

lock in
c OFF position
c OFF or ON position
lock in
padlock
keylock
padlock
locking
device + keylock
c OFF position keylock locking

c OFF or ON position device + keylock
Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, padlock
door opening prevented keylock keylock
Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a fault or
remote tripping order.
120
Access to pushbuttons
protected by transparent Locking on electrically operated devices
cover
1 reset of mechanical
trip indicator
2 OFF pushbutton
3 OFF position locking
3 4 ON pushbutton
5 springs charged indication
6 pushbutton locking
7 contact position indication
1 8 operation counter
Pushbutton locking using a 4
padlock
2
5
6
2
7
Pushbutton locking
OFF position locking using The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close
padlocks the device.
It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ON
button.
The pushbuttons may be locked using either:
c Three padlocks (not supplied)
c Lead seal
c Two screws.
Device locking in the OFF position

The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the
opening pushbutton pressed down:
OFF position locking using a c Using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied)
keylock and padlocks c Using a keylock (supplied).
Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks).
The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations:
c One keylock
c One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied
separately for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux,
Kirk or Castell).
121
Chassis locking
1 mismatch protection
2 door interlock
3 racking interlock
4 keylock locking
5 padlock locking
3 6 position indicator
7 chassis front plate
4 (accessible with cubicle
door closed)
2
5 8 crank entry
9 reset button
6 10 crank storage
7
8
1
9
10
2
Disconnected position locking

Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock
the circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners:
c Using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied)
c Using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available.
Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options:
c One keylock
c One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied
separately, using the same key, for interlocking with another device
c One (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks
supplied separately, for interlocking with another device.
A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks
(Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell).
Disconnected position Disconnected position
locking by padlocks locking by keylocks
Connected, disconnected and test position locking
The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator.
Door interlock The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained.
A release button is used to free it.
On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modified to lock the
circuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test.
Door interlock
Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of
the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the
breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed
without having to disconnect the circuit breaker.
Racking interlock
Racking interlock
This device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (device
cannot be connected).
Mismatch protection
Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with
compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one
on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may
select.
Mismatch protection
122
Auxiliary terminal shield
Other accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB)
Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the
terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries.
Operation counter (CDM)

The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the
Operation counter
front panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices.
Escutcheon (CDP)
2
Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases
the degree of protection to IP 40. It is available in fixed and withdrawable versions.
Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon

Escutcheon Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured
by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP 54 and the degree of
protection against mechanical impacts to IK 10. It may be used for withdrawable
devices only.
Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheon

Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yet
equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and
withdrawable devices.
Transparent cover
Blanking plate
123
Compact NS1600b to 3200 (fixed version)
2
Circuit breaker
NS1600b / 2500A
Circuit breaker Auxiliary

NS3200 contact
Voltage
release
Communication
module
124
Installation
Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only.
Fixed Compact NS
2
Mounting on rails
Connection
Front connection
NS1600 to 2500 NS3200
Bars
Bars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 3200
circuit breakers.
NS1600b to 2500
NS1600b to 2500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS3200
125
Indication contacts
Contacts installed in the device
Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can
thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc.
Functions
c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts
v An overload
2 OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts v A short-circuit

v An earth-leakage fault
v Operation of a voltage release
All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available v Operation of the "push to trip" button
in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset.
loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to:
circuits). v An overload
v A short-circuit
Installation
c OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different
indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in the
device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker.
Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts
Utilisation category (IEC 60947-5-1) AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14 AC12 AC15 DC12 DC14
Operational 24 V 6 6 2.5 1 5 3 5 1
current (A) 48 V 6 6 2.5 0.2 5 3 2.5 0.2
110 V 6 5 0.8 0.05 5 2.5 0.8 0.05
220/240 V 6 4 - - 5 2 - -
250 V - - 0.3 0.03 5 - 0.3 0.03
380/440 V 6 3 - - 5 1.5 - -
660/690 V 6 0.1 - - - - - -
126
Compact NS1600b to 3200 circuit Remote tripping
breakers may be equipped with an MX This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of a
shunt release, an MN undervoltage shunt release (MX), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltage
release or a delayed undervoltage release release (MN + delay unit).
(MN + delay unit). The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an
emergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit
MX voltage release breaker.
Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function
opening
order
opening
order
ordre de
déclenchement
retardé 10 12
2
retardateur
3 6
ordre de
C2 D2 déclenchement
instantané D2
MX MN MN
C1 D1 D1
Voltage releases (MX)

When energised, the MX voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker.
A continuous supply of power to the MX locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250- 240/277- 380/480- 500/550
V DC 1- 24/30- 48/60- 100/130- 200/250
Continuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un
Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 200
hold: 4.5
time at Un
Instantaneous voltage releases (MN)

The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage
drops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is not
supplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically.
Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts.
Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release
returns to 85% of its rated value.
Characteristics
Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480 - 500/550
V DC 24/30 - 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250
Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
threshold closing 0.85 Un
time at Un
MN delay units
To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of
the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external
delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable
and non-adjustable.
Characteristics
Power supply non-adjustable 100/130 - 200/250
V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60 - 100/130 - 200/250 - 380/480
Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un
closing 0.85 Un
Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3s
time at Un non-adjustable 0.25s
127
Device locking
accessories
lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device
position
Compact NS with toggle locked using a fixed device and

padlocks
Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device and

padlocks
128
Test equipment

test equipment for STR electronic trip units
Mini test kit
The mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to check
operation of the electronic trip unit and circuit-breaker tripping.
It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker.
Required power source: five 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied).
Portable test kit

The portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions:
c Long time protection
2
c Short time protection
c Instantaneous protection
Mini test kit Portable test kit c Earth-fault protection.
Required power source: 110 or 220 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

test equipment for Micrologic control units
Mini test kit
The autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to:
c Check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system
by sending a signal simulating a short-circuit
c Supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the
circuit-breaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units).
Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery.
Portable test kit

The portable test kit is available in two versions:
c The autonomous version with built-in keypad and display
c The complete version controlled by a PC.
The autonomous version may be used to check:
c The mechanical operation of the circuit breaker
c The electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the
control unit
c Operation of the control unit:
v Display of settings
v Operating tests on the ASIC electronic component
v Automatic and manual tests on protection functions
v Test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function
v Inhibition of the earth-fault protection
Portable test kit v Inhibition of the thermal memory.
The complete version controlled by a PC offers in addition:
c Comparison of the real tripping curve with the catalogue curves available
on the PC
c Reset of the M2C / M6C contacts and indications
c Reading and modification of settings and counters
c Reading of histories and logs
c Waveform capture
c Analysis of harmonics.
Note.
These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 3200 circuit breakers and
all Masterpact NW circuit breakers.
129
3
130
Compact NS Installation recommendations
Presentation 8
Operating conditions 132

Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights 133
Safety clearances and minimum distances 134
Installation example 136
Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 137
Connection of MN and MX voltage releases 138
Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA 139
NSC100N
Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630
Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs
140
141
3
Insulation of live parts 142
Power connections for Compact NS630b to 3200 143
Sizing of bars 145
Recommended drilling dimensions 147
Temperature derating 150
Power dissipation / Resistance 152
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
131
Installation Operating conditions
recommendations
Altitude derating
Altitude does not significantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 2000 m.
Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric
strength and cooling capacity of air.
The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 2000
metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged.
Compact NS80 to 630
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Average insulation level (V) 750 700 600 500
Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 550 480 420
Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000
Dielectric resistance voltage (V) 3500 3150 2500 2100
Average insulation level (V) 750 750 700 600
Maximum utilisation voltage (V) 690 590 520 460
Average thermal current (A) at 40 °C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In
3 Vibrations
Compact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations.
Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC 68-2-6 for the levels required
by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd’s, etc.):
c 2 ➞ 13.2 Hz: amplitude ± 1 mm
c 13.2 ➞ 100 Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g.
Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to
mechanical parts.
Electromagnetic disturbances
Compact NS devices are protected against:
c Overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances
c Overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distribution-
system outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system)
c Devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.)
c Electrostatic discharges produced by users.
Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility
tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards:
c IEC 60947-2, appendix F
c IEC 60947-2, appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function).
The above tests guarantee that:
c No nuisance tripping occurs
c Tripping times are respected.
132
Installation in switchboards
Power supply and weights
Power supply
Compact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom
without any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when
installed in a switchboard.
Weights
Circuit breaker Plug-in Chassis Vigi module Positive contact Motor-mechanism
NS80H-MA
NSC100N
3P/3D
3P/3D
4P/4D
1.09
1
1.3
base
1.5
1.7
indication (Interpact INV) module
3
NS100N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS100N 3P/2D 1.79 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS100N/H/L 3P/3D 2.05 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.57 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS160N/H 1P/1D 0.5
2P/2D 1.45
NS160N 3P/2D 1.85 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS160N/H/L 3P/3D 2.10 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.58 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS250N 3P/2D 1.94 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
NS250N/H/L 3P/3D 2.2 0.8 2.2 0.87 2 1.2
4P/4D 2.78 1.05 2.2 1.13 2.2 1.2
NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D 6.19 2.4 2.2 2.8 4.6 2.8
4P/4D 8.13 2.8 2.2 3 4.9 2.8
NS630b to 1600 3P 14 14
manual operation 4P 18 18
NS630b to 1600 3P 14 16
electrical operation 4P 18 21
NS1600b to 3200 3P 24
4P 36
The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete
configurations.
133
Installation Installation in switchboards
recommendations Safety clearances
and minimum distances
Compact NS80 to 630

When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be
maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices
installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity,
are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC 60947-2.
If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to:
c Use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections
c Block off the busbars using insulating screens.
For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and the
insulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisation
voltage and the type of installation (fixed, withdrawable). (See page 142.)
Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers
3
Minimal distance between Minimal distance between
the circuit breaker and top, the circuit breaker
bottom or side panels and front or rear panels
front F
panel if F < 8 mm : an
insulating screen
is mandatory
D1
D2 C1
C2
bare or painted sheetmetal; B F

insulation or insulated bars
Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars Bare sheetmetal

or painted sheetmetal
Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D2 C2 D1 D2 A1 (2) A2 (3) B
NS80H-MA U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
NSC100N U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0
NS100-250 U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 35 35 0 10 0
U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 35 35 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 35 35 0 40 0
NS400-630 U i 440 V 0 30 30 5 60 60 0 10 0
U < 600 V 0 30 30 10 (1) 60 60 0 20 0
U u 600 V 0 30 30 20 (1) 100 100 0 40 0
(1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers.
(2) For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields.
(3) For Compact NS without terminal shields.
The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the
134
Fixed Compact NS400 1000 V AC, front connection
Power supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars.
insulation
side panel
F
40 30
insulating kit
40 bare or painted
sheetmetal; 30
F insulation or
insulated bars
B=0
Insulating kit is standard. Connection using cables with lugs or busbars, F = 100.
Connection using bare cables, F = 150.
3
Compact NS630b to 3200 (fixed devices)
A (*) A (*)
B B
146,5 An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to

F remove the arc chutes.
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts

NS630b to 1600
A 0 0 180
B 0 0 60
NS1600b to 2500
A 0 30 180
B 0 0 60
NS3200
A 0 30 180
B 0 30 60
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices)

B B
A
C C
40
180
F
Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts

A 0 0 30
B 10 10 60
C 0 0 90
F Datum
135
Installation Installation in switchboards
recommendations Installation example
painted sheetmetal
A A A A
3
Direct connection by Connection by cables Connection by insulated Rear connection or plug-in
bare cables, devices with lugs, devices with bars, devices with base, devices with terminal
with terminal shields. terminal shields. terminal shields. shields.
Minimum dimensions (mm) A

Compact circuit breaker
NS80H-MA/NSC100N 0
NS100-630 0
NS630b-1600 250
NS1600b-3200 300
136
Door interlock
Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis,

this locking device prevents opening of the door if the Y
circuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. If
the circuit breaker was connected with the door open,
the door may be closed without having to disconnect
the circuit breaker.
4
61
2 (1) (2)
11
Dimensions (mm)
Type (1) (2)
NS630b to 1600 (3P) 135 168
NS630b to 1600 (4P) 205
Device in the connected or test positions

Door locked
168
3
porte
F
5
23
Device in the disconnected position

Door not locked
Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the left

or right-hand side of the chassis.
F Datum
137
Installation Connection of MN and MX
recommendations voltage releases for
Release wiring
During pick-up, the power drawn is approximately 150 to 200 VA. For low supply
voltages (12, 24, 48 V), the maximum cable length therefore depends on the
supply voltage and the size of the cables.
Indicative values for maximum wire lengths (in metres)
12 V 24 V 48 V
2.5 mm 2 1.5 mm 2 2.5 mm 2 1.5 mm 2 2.5 mm 2 1.5 mm 2
MN 100 % U source – – 58 35 280 165
85 % U source – – 16 10 75 45
MX 100 % U source 21 12 115 70 550 330
85 % U source 10 6 75 44 350 210
Note. The lengths mentioned are for each of the two supply wires.
138
Power connections for
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N
Standard With distribution

device connector
L (mm) 18 i 10
L S (mm 2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 16 rigid
1.5 to 50 flexible 1.5 to 10 flexible (1)
Tightening 5 2
torque (Nm)
S
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm 2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
139
Installation Power connections for
recommendations Compact NS100 to 630
Connection of insulated bars or
cables with lugs
NS100 NS160/250 NS400/630
Bars L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15
d (mm) i 10 i 10 i 15
400
Ø e (mm) i6 i6 3 i e i 10
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
d
l
L L
e
Lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25 i 32
Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5 10.5
Tightening torque (Nm) (1) 10 15 50
Tightening torque (Nm) (2) 5 5 20
(1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker
(2) Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base
Connections with accessories

3 NS100 to 250
Spreader
NS100 to 250
Pole pitch
Separate parts One-piece spreader Without spreaders 35 mm
Tinned copper With spreaders 45 mm
Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions
NS100 NS160/250
Bars L (mm) i 25 i 25
l (mm) 20 i I i 25 20 i I i 25
Ø d (mm) i 10 i 10
Where U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit means 400 e (mm) i6 i6
separate spreaders cannot be used. The one-piece
d Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5
spreader must be used. l Lugs L (mm) i 25 i 25
Straight terminal Right-angle terminal L L Ø (mm) 6.5 8.5
extensions extensions Tighten. (Nm) 10 (1), 5 (2) 15 (1), 5 (2)
e
Tinned copper. Tinned copper. torque
Upstream side. (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible
NS400 and 630

NS400 and 600
Pole pitch
Separate spreaders with 52.5 and 70 mm pole Without spreaders 45 mm
pitches With spreaders 52.5 ou 70 mm
Tinned copper Where U > 600 V,
Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions
use of the 52.5 mm
Bars L (mm) i 40 i 32
spreaders requires a
l (mm) d + 15 30 i I i 34
specific insulation kit.
d (mm) i 20 i 15
The 70 mm spreaders Ø
400 e (mm) 3 i e i 10 3 i e i 10
may not be used.
Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5
Edgewise terminal Right-angle terminal d
l Lugs L (mm) i 40 i 32
extension extensions Ø (mm) 12,5 10,5
L L
Tinned copper Tinned copper Tighten. (Nm) 50 (1), 20 (2) 50 (1), 20 (2)
Upstream side e torque
(1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker
(2) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base
Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible
Close-up view of two cables

with lugs.
140
NS100 to 250
1-cable connector Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block
1-cable connector Steel Aluminium

i 160A i 250A
L (mm) 20 20
L S (mm 2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) 10…16 25…35 50…185
Tightening torque (Nm) 12 15 20 26
S
6-cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium)
L (mm)
S (mm 2) Cu / Al
Tightening torque (Nm)
15 or 30
1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35
4 6
3
Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables)
L (mm) 12
S (mm 2) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10
(1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm2, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule.
NS400 and 630
1-cable connector 2-cable connector
1-cable connector 2-cable connector

1 cable 2 cables
L (mm) 20 30 or 60
L S (mm 2) Cu / Al 35 to 300 2 x 85 to 2 x 240
rigid / flexible rigid / flexible
Tightening torque (Nm) 31 31
141
recommendations Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.)
Fixed Compact NS, front connections

NS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
U < 500 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal
shields recommended. shields recommended.
Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory.
500 V i U i 600 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriers
or long terminal or long terminal or long terminal
shields are shields are shields are
mandatory. mandatory. mandatory.
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory.
U > 600 V Insulation kit Insulation kit Insulation kit
and insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated bars
The insulation kit is not compatible with:
c separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 250. The one-piece spreader must be used
c separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 52.5 mm spreaders, there
is a specific insulation kit.
3 Fixed Compact NS, rear connections
All voltage levels

NS100/250N/H/L
Short terminal shields
NS400/630N/H
NS400/630L
recommended. recommended. recommended.
Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connections

NS100/250N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L
All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields
Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars
are mandatory. are mandatory are mandatory.
for U u 500 V.
Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory.
142
Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses

Compact circuit breakers can be connected with bare-copper, tinned-copper and
tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables.
In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted
on the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place
using supports.
Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors,
contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support.
Ties for flexible bars and cables

The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the
prospective short-circuit current.
The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm.
Type of tie Width: 4.5 mm Width: 9 mm

Maximum load: 22 kg Maximum load: 90 kg
Maximum distance 200 100 50 350 200 100 70 50
between ties (mm) (double ties)
Short-circuit
current (kA rms)
10 15 20
Note. For cables u 50 mm2, use 9 mm-wide ties.

20 27 35 45 100
Connection of bars
Bars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B)
Bars must rest on a support firmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that the
circuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C).
Electrodynamic forces
The first spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (see
table below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance is
calculated to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of each
phase during a short-circuit.
Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection and the first spacer
between bars, depending on the short-circuit current
Isc (kA) 30 50 65 80 100 150
Distance (mm) 350 300 250 150 150 150
143
recommendations Compact NS630b to 3200
Connections
The quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same
consequences as under-tightening.
The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breaker
terminals are indicated in the table below.
The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts and
bolts (class 8.8).
The same values apply to AGS-T52 quality aluminium bars
(French standard NFA 02-104 and American National Standard H-35-1).
Examples of bar connections
3 1 terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm

2 circuit-breaker terminal
3 bars Tightening torque for bars
4 bolt Rated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm)
5 washer diameter with flat or grower with contact or split
6 nut washers washers
10 11 37.5 50
Bar drilling
Examples
Insulation distance
Dimensions (mm)
Utilisation voltage X minimum
Ui i 600 V 8 mm
Ui i 1000 V 14 mm
Bar bending
Bars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks.
Dimensions (mm)
e radius r
Minimum Recommended
5 5 7.5
10 15 18 to 20
144
Sizing of bars
The following tables are based on the following assumptions:

c Maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 °C
c Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections
c Busbars made of copper and not painted.
Note.
The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on the
basis of the assumptions mentioned above.
These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values must
be confirmed by tests on the installation.
Front or horizontal rear connections
3
Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS630b 400 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 2b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1000 1000 3b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1250 1250 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
2b.80 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5
NS1600 / 1600b 1400 3b.50 x 5 2b.40 x 10 2b.80 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10
NS1600 / 1600b 1600 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10
NS2000 1800 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 2b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10
NS2000 2000 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10
NS2500 2200 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 2b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 2b.100 x 10
NS2500 2500 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 2b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10
NS3200 2800 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10
NS3200 3000 5b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10
NS3200 3200 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10
Note
With Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wide bars (see "Recommanded busbars drilling")
145
Sizing of bars
Vertical rear connections
3
Compact Maximum Ti : 40 °C Ti : 50 °C Ti : 60 °C
service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars
current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick
NS800 800 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10
NS1000 1000 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10
NS1250 1250 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1600 1400 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 2b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 2b.50 x 10
NS1600 1600 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 2b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 5 2b.50 x 10
146
Recommended drilling dimensions
Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders
50 50 63 80
15 15
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5
Middle left or middle Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader Left or right spreader
right spreader for 4P for 4P for 3P
77 77 77 77
44 38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 13,5
13,5 13,5 13,5
25 9,5 12,5 25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
2 Ø11
12,5
60
82 52 15
5 Ø11
30
82 52 15
30
5 Ø11
82 52 15
5 Ø11
30
82 52 15
30
5 Ø11
3
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52
Vertical rear connection
32 40 50 63 80
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 25 25 25 25
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5
60
12,5
12,5 9,5
25 44
2 Ø11
Front connection Front connection with vertical-connection adapter
50 50 63 80
15 15
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5
Top terminal Bottom terminal 89 12,5

25 = = 15
44
9,5
25 2 vis M10 15
15 21
101 21
3 Ø11
25 15
2 vis M10 15 9,5 15 20
44
147
Recommended drilling dimensions
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)
50 63 80
15 15
12,5 12,5 25,5 12,5
Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi Ø12 maxi
25 12,5 25 12,5 25 25 12,5
76 25
13
3 ø11
15
3 Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 2500)
63 80 100
ø12 maxi ø12 maxi ø12 maxi ø12 maxi
25 25 25 25
25 25 25 100 25
25 25 25 25
12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 12,5
4 Ø11
25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
45 15 25 25
60 80
Front connection (NS3200)
100 ø12 maxi

ø12 maxi
25
25 100 25
25 25
25
12,5 12,5
12,5 12,5
4 Ø11
25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
45 15 25 25
60 80
148
Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 °C, overload-protection
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: characteristics are slightly modified.
c Vigi module To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values corresponding
c Ammeter module to the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below.
c Insulation-monitoring module
c Current-transformer module. Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit Rating (A) 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65 °C 70 °C
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: 16 16 15.6 15.2 14.8 14.5 14 13.8
c Ammeter module 25 25 24.5 24 23.5 23 22 21
c Current-transformer module. 40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation- 80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below 100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
must be applied. 125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
Trip unit Coefficient 160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
TM16 to TM125 1 200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
TM160 to TM250 0.9 250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Rating (A)
16
25
40°C
16
25
45°C
15.6
24.5
50°C
15.2
24
55°C
14.8
23.5
60°C
14.5
23
65 °C
14
22
70 °C
13.8
21
3
32 32 31.3 30.5 30 29.5 29 28.5
40 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
50 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
63 63 61.5 60 58 57 55 54
80 80 78 76 74 72 70 68
100 100 97.5 95 92.5 90 87.5 85
125 125 122 119 116 113 109 106
160 160 156 152 147.2 144 140 136
200 200 195 190 185 180 175 170
250 250 244 238 231 225 219 213
149
Installation Temperature derating
recommendations Compact NS devices equipped with
The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, the
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: maximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambient
c Vigi module temperature.
c Ammeter module
c Insulation-monitoring module
c Current-transformer module. Compact NS100...NS250
They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
breakers equipped with one of the following modules: on the ambient temperature.
c Ammeter module NS100N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
c Current-transformer module. In: 40 to 160 A no derating
However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation- NS250N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below In: 100 to 160A no derating
must be applied. Ir max 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. In: 250A 250 250 250 237.5 237.5 225 225
NS100N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 100 1 Ir max 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90
NS160N/H/L STR22SE/GE 40 to 160 1
NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 100 and 160 1 Compact NS400 and NS630
3
NS250N/H/L STR22SE/GE 250 0.86 The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending
on the ambient temperature.
The values opposite are valid for fixed or plug-in / NS400N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of Fixed In: 400A 400 400 400 390 380 370 360
the following modules: Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9
c Ammeter module Plug-in / In: 400 400 390 380 370 360 350 340
c Current-transformer module. withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
However, for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit
NS630N/H/L 40 °C 45 °C 50 °C 55 °C 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C
breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulation-
Fixed In: 630A 630 615 600 585 570 550 535
monitoring module, the coefficients in the table below
Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.8 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85
must be applied.
Plug-in / In: 570A 570 550 535 520 505 490 475
Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/0.8 0.8/0.98 0.8/0.95
NS400N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.97
STR23SV and 53SV
NS630N/H/L STR23SE and 53UE 0.9
STR23SV and 53SV
Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuit
breakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined with
INV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected
combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue.
150
Temperature derating
Compact NS devices equipped with
Compact NS630b to NS1600 (1)

The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature.
For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections.
Version Fixed device
Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear
temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NS1250 N/H 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1170 1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1090
NS1600 N/H 1600 1600 1560 1510 1470 1420 1360 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1510 1460
Version Withdrawable device

temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS630b N/H/L 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 N/H/L 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NS1000 N/H/L
NS1250 N/H
NS1600 N/H
1000
1250
1600
1000
1250
1600
1000
1250
1520
1000
1250
1480
1000
1250
1430
1000
1240
1330
920
1090
1160
1000
1250
1600
1000
1250
1600
1000
1250
1600
1000
1250
1560
1000
1250
1510
1000
1250
1420
990
1180
1250
3
temp. Ti (2) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
NS1600b N/H 1600 1600 1600 1600 1500 1450 1400 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1550 1500
NS2000 N/H 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800 1700 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1900 1800
NS2500 N/H 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500
NS3200 N/H - - - - - - - 3200 3200 3200 3180 3080 2970 2860
(1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker.
(2) Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections.
151
Installation Power dissipation / Resistance
recommendations Compact NS devices equipped
with thermal-magnetic trip units
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Compact NSC100N

Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ). Fixed device Additional modules
Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi (N, L3) Vigi (L1, L2)
50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker NSC100N 16 15 4 0.06 0.06
(values above power P = 3RI2). 20 11.2 4.5 0.1 0.1
25 8 5 0.16 0.16
32 5.4 5.5 0.26 0.26
40 3.7 6 0.4 0.4
50 2.8 7 0.63 0.63
63 2 8 1 1
70 2 10 1.3 1.3
80 1.4 9 1.6 1.6
100 1 10 2.5 2.5
NSC100NA 100 0.6 6 2.5 2.5
Compact NS100 to 250 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units
Fixed device Additional modules
3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.
3 NS100N/H/L 16
25
32
11.42
6.42
3.94
2.92
4.01
4.03
(N, L3)
0
0
0.06
(L1, L2)
0
0
0.03
drawablemodule
0
0.1
0.15
0
0
0.1
module
0
0
0.1
40 3.42 5.47 0.10 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
50 1.64 4.11 0.15 0.08 0.3 0.1 0.1
63 2.17 8.61 0.3 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.1
80 1.37 8.77 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.88 8.8 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 80 1.26 8.06 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.77 7.7 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
125 0.69 10.78 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.55 13.95 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NS250N/H/L 125 0.61 9.45 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.3 0.3
160 0.46 11.78 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
200 0.39 15.4 2.8 1.4 4 0.8 0.8
250 0.3 18.75 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip units

Fixed device Additional modules
3 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.
(N, L3) (L1, L2) drawablemodule module
NS80H 1.5 93.3 0.21
2.5 89.6 0.56
6.3 75.6 3
12.5 12.8 2
25 2.24 1.4
50 1.04 2.6
80 0.94 6.02
NS100N/H/L 2.5 148.42 0.93 0 0 0 0 0
6.3 99.02 3.93 0 0 0 0 0
12.5 4.05 0.63 0 0 0 0 0
25 1.66 1.04 0 0 0.1 0 0
50 0.67 1.66 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.1 0.1
100 0.52 5.2 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 150 0.38 8.55 1.35 0.68 2.6 0.45 0.45
NS250N/H/L 220 0.3 14.52 2.9 1.45 4.89 0.97 0.97
NS400H/L 320 0.12 12.29 3.2 1.6 6.14 1.54 1.54
NS630H/L 500 0.1 25 13.99 7 15 3.75 3.75
Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160

Fixed device
1/2 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole
NS100N/H 16 11.3 2.89
20 6.3 2.52
30 2.9 2.61
40 2.9 4.64
50 1.4 3.5
63 1.4 5.56
80 1.25 8
100 0.76 7.6
NS160N/H 125 0.63 9.84
160 0.48 12.29
152
Power dissipation / Resistance
Compact NS devices equipped
with electronic trip units
Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Compact NS100 to NS630
Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mΩ) Fixed device Additional modules
(measured cold). Total power dissipation is the value 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo.
measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four- (N, L3) (L1, L2) drawablemodule module
pole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI2). NS100N/H/L 40 0.84 1.34 0.1 0.05 0.2 0.1 0.1
100 0.468 4.68 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
NS160N/H/L 40 0.73 1.17 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.1 0.1
100 0.36 3.58 0.7 0.35 1 0.2 0.2
160 0.36 9.16 1.8 0.9 2.6 0.5 0.5
NS250N/H/L 100 0.27 2.73 1.1 0.55 1.6 0.2 0.2
250 0.28 17.56 4.4 2.2 6.3 1.3 1.3
NS400N/H/L 400 0.12 19.2 3.2 1.6 9.6 2.4 2.4
NS630N/H/L 630 (1) 0.1 39.69 6.5 3.25 19.49 5.95 5.95
(1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given
for 570 A

NS630b N/H/L
NS800 N/H/L
NS1000 N/H/L
Dissipated power
30/45
45/60
65/100
Input/output resistance
0.026/0.039
0.026/0.039
0.026/0.039
3
NS1250 N/H 130 0.026
NS1600 N/H 220 0.026
Version Withdrawable device

Dissipated power Input/output resistance
NS630 N/H/L 55/115 0.05
NS800 N/H/L 90/120 0.05
NS1000 N/H/L 150/230 0.05
NS1250 N/H 250 0.036
NS1600 N/H 460 0.036
Compact NS1600b à 3200

Dissipated power Input/output resistance
NS1600b N/H 250 0.019
NS2000 N/H 250 0.013
NS2500 N/H 300 0.008
NS3200 N/H 680 0.008
153
4
154
Compact NS Dimensions
Presentation 8
Compact NS80H-MA 156

Compact NSC100 158
Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 160
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 162
Compact NS100 to 630 164
Vigicompact NS100 to 630 166
Compact NS100 to 250 168
(single-pole and two-pole versions)
Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to 630 170
Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to 630 172
Indication and measurement modules 174
Front accessories for Compact NS100 to 630
Dimensions
176
178
4
Mountings 179
Front-panel cutouts 180
Rotary handle 181
Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version)
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts 182
Rotary handle 183
Dimensions 184
External modules 186
Accessories 190
Connection 193
155
Dimensions Compact NS80H-MA
Dimensions Mounting
On backplate On rails
30 30
15 15
≤ 32
103
120
100 100
X X X X
60 206 48,5 48,5
(a) ∅4
Y Y
∅4
Y
64,5 45
70 90
80
84
100
Z
(a) long terminal shields
4 Front-panel cutouts
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
60,5 68,5 68,5

X X X X
26 30 30
B/C
Y Y Y
71 14,5 46
81 29 92
Z
156
Standard direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
7,5
ON
I
65,5 60° 4,2 68,5
tripped X X
28,5 60° X 30
O
OFF
Y
47,5 Y
82,5 45 85 43
112 80 Z 86
Z 90

Front-panel cutout
75
37,5
45°
7,5
7,5
60°
4,2 75
∅50
4,2
4
X 37,5 X
60° ∅4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 175
L ( maxi 590 )
Z
shaft length = L _ 109
MCC direct rotary handle

Front-panel cutout
120
69,2
7,5
4,2 120 100

X
X
60 45,8
1 to 3 maxi Y
Y 51,7
116 ± 2
100
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
h
enclosure where u 100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge. ∆
157
Dimensions Compact NSC100
Dimensions
Compact NSC100
3 poles 4 poles
103
120
X X X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 45
84 90 120
100
Z (a) long terminal shields
Vigicompact NSC
3 poles 4 poles
101,2
4 103
120
X X
X
60 206
90
(a) (a)
Y Y
15 70
80 45 75
84 210 240
100
Z (a) long terminal shields.
158
Front-panel cutout
75
37,5
5 45° 5
83
Ø50
60°
3 3
X 75
X 37,5 X
60° Ø4,2
Y 72 36 Y
mini 122
Z
maxi 147
Note.
4
Centre line X indicates the centre of the mounting rail.
159
Dimensions Compact NS100 to 630
(fixed version)
Dimensions
2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
H1 H3 H5 H7
X X
H H2 H4 H6
(a)
Y (b)
(a) short terminal shields.
(c)
(b) long terminal shields Y
L (available for spreaders on
L
P1 L1 NS400 to 630, pitch 52.5 :
L2
P2 L1 = 157.5 mm,
P4 L2 = 210 mm).
Z (c) interphase barriers.
Mounting
On backplate
4
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y
(d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers,
the centre hole is not necessary.
On rails
K1 K2
U (e) K K
G1
X X
G ∅T
Y Y
On DIN rail with adapter plate
G50
G51
G49
G48
G47
160
Front-panel cutouts
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker
Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C
C1 C3 C3
X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
R1 R4(3P)
P5 R5(4P)
P6
Z
With escutcheon With toggle cover
C6
C7
X C21
C20
4
Y Y
R6
R12
P6 R7 R13
Z
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 C20 C21 G G1 G4
NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 54 108 43 104 34 86 62.5 125 70
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 92.5 184 56.5 146 46.5 126 100 200 113.5
Type G5 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 H H1 H2 H3 H4

NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 95 75 13.5 23 17.5 80.5 161 94 188 160.5
NS400/630N/H/L 227 127.5 255 142.5 285 240
Type H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2
NS100/160/250N/H/L 321 178.5 357 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86
NS400/630N/H/L 480 237 474 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110
Type P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R12
NS100/160/250N/H/L 111(1) 83 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 43
NS400/630N/H/L 168 107 112 31.5 63 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 63
(1) : P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R13 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 6 22 ≤ 32
NS400/630N/H/L 126 6 32 ≤ 32
(e) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).
Nota : h
hinge. ∆
161
Dimensions Vigicompact NS100 to 630
(fixed version)
Dimensions
X X
H9 H11 H13 H15
H8 H10 H12 H14
(a)
(b)
(c)
Y Y
P1 L L
P2 (a) short terminal shields
L1 L2
(b) long terminal shields
P4
Z (c) interphase barriers
Mounting
4 On backplate
2 poles or 3 poles
K1 K1
4 poles
K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d) Y
Y
On rails
K1 K2
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y
162
Front-panel cutouts
Cutout A Cutout B
R1
R
C1
X X
C
C3
C4
C2
C5
R28
B
Y Y
P5 R28 R26
P6 R26 R2
Z R4 (3P)
R5 (4P)
With escutcheons
4
R7
R6
C7
X
C6
C18
C19
Y
P6 R27
Z R11
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C18 C19 C20 C21 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9
NS100/160/250N/H/L 29 76 130 184 86 37 43 104 71 68 34 86 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 192 276 147.5 37 56.5 146 132 68 46.5 126 100 200 200 300 213.5 327
Type H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 L L1 L2 P1 P2 P4 P5

NS100/160/250N/H/L 155.5 236 169 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 52.5 105 140 81 86 111(1) 83
NS400/630N/H/L 227.5 355 242.5 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 70 140 185 95.5 110 168 107
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R12 R13 R26 R27 ØT ØT4 U(e)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 88 14.5 29 54 108 143 29 58 58 43 86 14.5 29 6 22 ≤ 32
NS400/630N/H/L 112 31.5 29 71.5 143 188 46.5 93 58 63 126 32 47 6 32 ≤ 32
(e) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).
Note.
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the h
enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
hinge. ∆
163
Dimensions
Plug-in base 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
N M
Z
(*)
K1 K1 K1
H17 G11
X X
H16 G10
(*)
Y Y
L L
P7 L1 L2
P8
P9 P4
Chassis 2 poles or 3 poles 4 poles
4 H19
X X X
H18
(*) (*)
Z Y Y
P7 L6 L6
P8 L7 L9
P9 P2 P12 L8 L10
P4
Mounting
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
2P, 3P K1 4P K2 2P, 3P K1 4P K2
K K K K
G11 G13 G11 G13

X X X X
G10 G12 G10 G12
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)

2P, 3P 4P
K21 K22
U K20 K20
X X
G21
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.
Nota :
G20 Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the
Y Y enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door
∅T hinge.
164
On backplate N (plug-in base or chassis)
Front connection (insulating screen is mandatory between the backplate and the base, supplied with the base)
2P, 3P 4P
K2
K
H20
H22
H21
X
H23
P33
P32 Y
Z
Interior rear connection Exterior rear connection

2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
K1 K2 K1 K2
K K K K K K K K
∅T6
G16
X
G15
X
G18
X
G15
X
4
∅T
G14 G17 G14 G19
Y Y Y Y
∅T K1 K1 K1 K1 K1 ∅T5 K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons
C11
X
C17
P44
Z
Y
R8
R9
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 42.5 95 190 87 174 77.5 155 66 132 82 164 37.5 75 111 222 190
NS400/630N/H/L 155 56 150 300 137 274 125 250 101 202 126 252 75 150 170.5 341 283.5
Type G25 G26 G27 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1 K2 K5 K6 K7 K11 K12 K13 K20
NS100/160/250N/H/L 380 208 416 102.5 205 103.5 210 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 74 148 183 35
NS400/630N/H/L 567 318.5 637 157.5 315 140 280 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 91.5 183 228 50
Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P10 P12
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 92.5 185 216 220 251 86 111(1) 27 45 75 64 32
NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 110 220 250 265 295 110 168 27 45 100 86 32
Type P44 R8 R9 U(2) ØT ØT5 ØT6
NS100/160/250N/H/L 123 74 148 ≤ 32 6 24 30
NS400/630N/H/L 147 90 180 ≤ 32 6 33 33
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L
(2) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 250).
165
Dimensions Vigicompact NS100 to 630
Dimensions
Plug-in base
N M K1 K1 K1
(*)
H17 G11
X X X
H16 G10
(*)
Y Y
P7 L L
P8 L1 L2
P9 P4
Z
Chassis
4
See withdrawable Compact, page 164.
Mounting
Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis)
2P, 3P 4P 2P, 3P 4P
K1 K2 K1 K2
K K K K
G11 G13 G11 G13

X X X X
G10 G12 G10 G12
Y Y Y Y
∅T K5 K5 ∅T K11 K11
K6 K7 K12 K13
On rails (plug-in base or chassis)

2P, 3P 4P
K21 K22
U K20 K20
X X
G21
G20
Y Y
∅T
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory
166
Front-panel cutouts
Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons
See fixed Compact, page 160.
R9
R8
C11
X
C16
C17
C13
Y
P44 R33
Z R34
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G12 G13 G20 G21 H16
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 55 42.5 95 190 87 174 37.5 75 102.5
NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 150 300 137 274 75 150 157.5
Type
NS100/160/250N/H/L
NS400/630N/H/L
H17
205
315
K
17.5
22.5
K1
35
45
K2
70
90
K5
54.5
71.5
K6
109
143
K7
144
188
K11
74
91.5
K12
148
183
K13
183
228
K20
35
50
4
Type K21 K22 L L1 L2 P4 P7 P8 P9 P44 R8
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 105 52.5 105 140 111(1) 27 45 75 123 74
NS400/630N/H/L 100 145 70 140 185 168 27 45 100 147 90
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS250N/H/L.
Type R9 R33 R34 ØT U(2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 148 74 148 6 ≤ 32
NS400/630N/H/L 180 91.5 148 6 ≤ 32
Note.
h
hinge. ∆
167
(single-pole and two-pole versions)
Dimensions
1 pole 2 poles
H1 H3 H7
X X
H H2 H6
(a)
(b)
Y
L3 Y
L3
P1 L5
L4
P2
P4 (a) short terminal shields
Z (b) interphase barriers
Mounting
On backplate
1 pole 2 poles
4 K1
K
K1
K
G1 G5
X X
G G4
ØT
ØT4 (c)
Y Y
(c) for rear connection only
On rails
1 pole 2 poles
K1
U (d)
K K
G1
X X
G ØT
Y Y
(d) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used
168
Front-panel cutout
C1 C3 C3
X X X
C
C2 C2
B/C Y Y Y
R R2
R1 R4(1P)
P5 R5(2P)
P6
Z
With escutcheon
C7
X
C6
P6
Y
R7
R6 4
Z
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C2 C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H
NS100/160/250 29 76 54 108 43 104 62.5 125 70 140 80.5
Type H1 H2 H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5
NS100/160/250 161 94 188 160.5 178.5 357 17.5 35 17.5 70 35
Type P1 P2 P4 P5 P6 R R1 R2 R4 R5 R6
NS100/160/250 81 86 111 83 88 14.5 29 19 38 73 29
Type R7 ØT ØT4 U(d)

NS100/160/250 58 6 22 ≤ 32
(d) U 20 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used
Note. h
hinge. ∆
169
Dimensions Motor-mechanism module for
Dimensions
3 poles 4 poles
H20
H22
H21 X
X
H23
Y Y
L L
L12 L2
L11
P33 L1
P32
Z
Front-panel cutouts
With IP 40, IK 07 escutcheons and protection collar
for Vigi module
R9
4
R8
C11
X C23 X
C16
C22 C17
Y C13
R14
R15
Y
P45 P45 R33
Z Z R34
Note.
h
hinge. ∆
170
Dimensions (mm)
Type C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 H20 H21 H22 H23 L L1
NS100/160/250N/H/L 103 84 56 42.5 29 76 62.5 97 45.5 73 52.5 105
NS400/630N/H/L 155 84 116.5 56 41.5 126 100 152 83 123 70 140
Type L2 L11 L12 P32 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34
NS100/160/250N/H/L 140 91 45.5 178 143 145 74 148 48.5 97 74 148
NS400/630N/H/L 185 123 61.5 250 215 217 90 180 64.5 129 91.5 148
171
Dimensions Rotary handle
direct rotary handle

3 poles 4 poles
L12
I
H23 60° I
H24 60°
DD
DD X
H20 60° O
X 60° O
(a) sans serrure

(b) avec serrure Ronis + clef
(c) avec serrure Profalux + clef Y Y
L15 L
P34 L L2
P35 (a) L11
P36 (b) L1
Z P37 (c)
(a) without keylock

(b) with Ronis keylock
(c) with Profalux keylock
Front-panel cutouts
Compact Vigicompact
4
X C23 X C23
C22
C4
C22
Y C5
R14
P43
Z R15
Y
P43 R28
Z
R26
R14
R15
Withdrawable circuit breaker

Compact Vigicompact
R9
R8
C11 C11
X X
C16
C17 C17
C13
P44
Z
Y Y
R8 P44 R33
R9 Z R34
An escutcheon is mandatory Protection collar for Vigi module is mandatory.

Escutcheons are mandatory for rotary handles and Vigi protection collars.
172
MCC direct rotary handle
Front-panel cutout
L8
L7
L12
H24 H10 G39

X
X H9 G38
X
1 to 3 maxi Y
±2 Y K14
P42 K15
Z
Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker
Cut shaft at length: Cut shaft at length:
P38-126 mm (NS100 to 250) P40-122 mm (NS100 to 250)
P38-150 mm (NS400 to 630) P40-150 mm (NS400 to 630)
L14
L13
L12
10 60°
I
H24 H26
4
O
X H25
60°
Y
P38
Z
Front-panel cutout
45°
L12
∅T7
H24
∅T6
G36
G37 Y
Dimensions (mm)
Type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C22 C23 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H20 H23 H24
NS100/160/250N/H/L 86 37 103 84 55 42,5 29 76 36 72 41 100 60 120 28 73 9
NS400/630N/H/L 147,5 37 155 84 116,5 56 41,5 126 36 72 51 145 83 160 40 123 24,5
Type H25 H26 K14 K15 L L1 L2 L7 L8 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36
NS100/160/250N/H/L 37,5 75 50 100 52,5 105 140 69 120 91 9,25 37,5 75 55 121 155 156
NS400/630N/H/L 37,5 75 72,5 145 70 140 185 85 160 123 5 37,5 75 66,5 145 179 180
Type P37 P38(1) P40(1) P42 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R26 R33 R34 ØT6 ØT7
NS100/160/250N/H/L 164 ≥ 185 ≥ 248 125 89 123 29 74 148 48,5 97 14,5 74 148 4,2 50
NS400/630N/H/L 188 ≥ 209 ≥ 272 149 112 147 29 90 180 64,5 129 32 91,5 148 4,2 50
(1) 600 mm.
Nota :
Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where 100 + (h x 5)
with respect to the door hinge.
173
Dimensions Indication
and measurement modules
Dimensions
Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module
H9 H11 H13 H15 H9 H11 H13 H15
H8 H10 H12 H14 H8 H10 H12 H14
P1 P1
P2 P2
P47 P4
Z Z
Mounting
4 On backplate
K1 K1 K1 K1 K1
K1 K2
K K
G7 G1 G9
X X
G6 G8
∅T
∅T4 (d)
Y Y

On rails
K1 K2
U (e) K K
G7 G1
X X
G6
∅T
Y Y
174
Front-panel cutout
Circuit breaker with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator
∅T8
C30
C1
X
C
C28
C27
Y
P6 R
Z R1
R16
R17
∅T8
C23
C30 4
X
C22
C28
C27
Y
R16
P43
Z R17
R14
R15
Dimensions (mm)
Type C C1 C22 C23 C27 C28 C29 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 H8 H9 H10
NS100/160/250N/H/L 28 76 28 76 56.5 124 30 78.5 62.5 125 137.5 200 145 215 155.5 236 169
NS400/630N/H/L 41.5 116 41.5 126 56.5 185.5 30 122 100 200 200 300 213.5 327 227.5 355 242.5
Type H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K2 P1 P2 P4 P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1

NS100/160/250N/H/L 263 235.5 396 253.5 432 17.5 35 70 81 86 111(1) 88 89 137 128 14.5 29
NS400/630N/H/L 385 340 580 337 574 22.5 45 90 95.5 110 168 112 112 162 154 31.5 63
Type R14 R15 R16 R17 ØT ØT4 U(2)

NS100/160/250N/H/L 48.5 97 46.5 93 6 22 ≤ 32
NS400/630N/H/L 64.5 129 64.5 93 6 32 ≤ 32
(1) P4 = 126 mm for Compact NS 250N/H/L
175
Dimensions Front accessories
Protection collar
Toggle protection collar
.
.
M
A D
Vigi-module protection collar Circuit breaker with Circuit breaker with

toggle or rotary handle motor-mechanism
module
52,4
91 35 63
Toggle cover
4 M8
A3 D3
Front-panel escutcheons
For toggle
M2 M3
A1 D1 D2
For Vigi module
79 64
69 3,5 6,5
176
Front-panel escutcheons
For protection collar, motor mechanism or rotary handle
M6 M7
A2 D1 D2
For Vigi module with protection collar or ammeter module
93,5 80,5
157 3,5 6,5
Dimensions (mm)
Type
NS100/160/250N/H/L
NS400/630N/H/L
A
91
123
A1
69
102
A2
157
189
A3
94
35
D
35
134
D1
3.5
3.5
D2
6.5
6.5
D3
40
60
M
73
123
M2
115
155
M3
102
142
M6
114
164
M7
101
151
M8
94
134
4
177
Dimensions Compact NS630b to 1600
(fixed version)
Dimensions
Manual control
Front connection
(1)
254
163,5
327
508 200
X X
100
Z
99,5 (3P)
Y
107,5 99,5
169,5 (4P)
205 (1) terminal shields are
F optional
Rear connection
4 105 (3P)
175 (4P)
188
105
94
Y
123
105
234 210
113 X X
92,5
117 123
Z F
107,5 35
140,5 70
146,5
205 14
Electrical control
Front and rear connection
105 (3P)
175 (4P) 105
188
94
Y
123
105
210 234 200

X X
117 100
123
F : Datum
Note.
Z Dimensions for front and rear
107,5 35 connection on electrically
169,5 70 operated devices are
99,5 (3P) identical to those for
175,5 99,5
F 169,5 (4P) manually operated devices.
178
Mounting
Front connection
On rails On backplate
Y
Y 4 Ø6,5
4 Ø6,5
200 200
X X
100 100
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P) 99,5
99,5 (3P)
169,5 (4P) 99,5
Rear connection
On backplate or rails
3P
Y
4 Ø6,5
4P
Y
6 Ø6,5 4
106 106
44 44
234 234
X 44
X 44
106 106 117
117
35 35
70 70 70
100 100
200 270
Note.
Mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually
operated devices.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device
Z is the back plane of the device.
179
(fixed version) (cont.)
Front-panel cutouts
Toggle control
124 mini Door cutout

(A) (1) (2)
(B) A B
(C) 150
(2) 194 mini (3P) 194 mini
264 mini (4P)
Y
X 216 (1)
266 (2)
X
108 (1)
133 (2)
107,5 194 (1) 97 (1)

140,5 244 (2) 122 (2)
146,5
F
Z
C
194 mini (3P) 194 mini
264 mini (4P)
Y
119 (1)
144 (2)
4 X
95,5 (1)
108 (2)
35,5 (1)
(1) Without escutcheon 60,5 (2)
71 (1)
(2) With escutcheon 121 (2)
Electrical control
Door cutout
A
150 mini
(A) (1) (2) 194 mini (3P) 194 mini
264 mini (4P)
Y
X 216 (1)
266 (2)
X
108 (1)
133 (2)
107,5
194 (1) 97 (1)
169,5 244 (2) 122 (2)
175,5
F
Z
(1) Without escutcheon

(2) With escutcheon
180
Rotary handle

Dimensions
(A) 124 mini

(1) (2)
(B)
(D) 180 mini
(2)
195
X
107,5
154,5
160,5
189,5
229,5
F
Z
A
Door cutout
194 mini (3P) 194 mini

B D
194 mini (3P)

194 mini
4
264 mini (4P) 194 mini 264 mini (4P)
Y Y Y
201 (1) 201 (1)

X 216 (1) X X
266 (2)
100,5 (1)
100,5 (1)
108 (1)
133 (2)
90,5 (1) 90,5 (1)
194 (1) 97 (1) 130 (1)
244 (2) 122 (2) 181 (1)

(2) With escutcheon

Dimensions Door cutout
Note.
F : Datum Z is the back plane of the device.
181
(withdrawable version)
Dimensions, mounting and cutouts
Dimensions
Manual control Electrical control
127,5 (3P) 160,5

197,5 (4P)
188
94
Y
199
X
123
90 (3P)
160 (4P) 90
(*) Withdrawable position
4 Mounting
Bottom mounting on base plate or rails Vertical on uprights or backplate
Y
Y
X
4 Ø6,5
6 Ø6,5
150
X
24 25 25 100 50
100
216
231
F 90 (3P) F
90 109 (3P)
160 (4P) 109
179 (4P)
Cutouts
Door cutout Rear panel cutout
X
234
117
102,5 (3P)
172,5 (4P) 102,5

(2) With escutcheon
Note.
F : Datum X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
182
Rotary handle

Dimensions
(*) Widrawable position
Door cutout

(2) With escutcheon

Dimensions Door cutout
Note.
183
(fixed version)
Dimensions
Dimensions
(A) 145 mini

(B) Y
(C)
165
105
330 150 210

X X
75
20 162
40 169
131 338
160,5 180 (3P)
295 (4P) 180
166,5 195 (3P)
310 (4P) 195
242 210 (3P) 210
F 325 (4P)
4
390
Z
Mounting on rails
Y
4 Ø12
X
150
75
195 (3P)
310 (4P) 195
184
Door cutout
A B
Y Y
X X 201
216
108 100,5
173 166
346 332
4
X 119
95,9
73
146
Note.
185
External modules
Control-wire connections to terminal block
S : 0,6 mm2
S : 2,5 mm2 2
8
Ø3,5
Only one wire per terminal.
External power-supply module (AD)
60 2 Ø6
73 60
4 112
75
Battery module (BAT)
60 2 Ø6
60
73
112
75
186
MN delay unit
2 Ø4,2
57
66
81 42
73
73,5
72
46
Chassis communication module

ModBus Digipact
90
4
45
58
54
External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection

External sensor "MDGF" summing module
200
130
45 76
150
187
External modules (cont.)
External sensor for neutral

400/1600 A (NS630b to 1600)
4 Ø14
GND VN VC
H1 H2
35 76
X2 X1 SG2 SG1
177
208
1000/4000 A (NS1600b to 3200)
8 Ø14
H1 H2
SG1
SG2
X1
X2 44 127
4
GND
VN
VC
44 174 44
295
Installation
400/1600 (NS630b to NS1600) 1000/4000 A (NS1600b to NS3200)
188
Vigi rectangular sensor
280 x 115 mm inside dimensions 4 Ø9
M1M2M3
470 x 160 mm inside dimensions 8 Ø9
M1M2M3
4
Busbars I i 1600 A I i 3200 A
Sensor 280 x 115 470 x 160
Weight (kg) 14 18
Busbars path
280 x 115 window 470 x 160 window

Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centr
M1 M2M3
M1 M2M3
2 bars 50 x 10
4 bars 100 x 5
M1 M2M3
M1 M2M3
2 bars 100 x 5
4 bars 125 x 5
189
Dimensions Accessories NS630b to 3200
Escutcheon
NS630b to 1600 (fixed control)
A C
NS630b to NS1600 (withdrawable control)
190
4
191
5
192
Compact NS Connection
Presentation 8
Dimensions 155
Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 194

Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 196
Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and
withdrawable versions) 198
Bars 200
Cables with lugs and bare cables 203
Bars 204
Cables with lugs 206

193
Connection Compact NS80H-MA,
NSC100N
Compact NS80H-MA
194
Compact NSC100N
30 30 34,5
48,5
X X
48,5
Y
45 34,5
90 83
Z
195
Connection Compact, Vigicompact
NS100 to 630 (fixed version)
Connection dimensions
P21
P13
G4
X X
G5
G19
Y
Z K1 K1 K1
Front connection
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Z Z
10,5
14
70
113,5
X
5
X
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Z Z Z
46,5
19 14
70 113,5
113,5
X
X X
Rear connection
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
(*) Short RC / long RC
196
Connection with accessories
Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only) Straight or edgewise terminal extensions
NS100/160/250 NS100/160/250
37,5 4
39,5 (b)
41 Z
20,5 30
70 70
Z
X X
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
NS400/630
NS400/630
61 8
Z
34
113,5
Distribution connectors (interphase barriers mandatory) Spreader

NS100/160/250
K10 K9
K8 K8 K8 K8 K8
G27
X
70
G26 5
X X
41
64,5 Y Y
66,5 (b)
Z
(b) Vigi module or NS250.
Dimensions (mm)
Type G4 G5 G19 G26 G27 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P21
NS100/160/250N/H/L 70 140 215 30 41 35 45 159 114 19.5(1)
NS400/630N/H/L 113.5 227 327 39 54 45 52.5 187.5 135 26 44
52,5 67,5 70 240 170
(1) P13 = 21.5 mm for NS250N/H/L and Vigi MH module
Note.
For dimensions of conductors, see pages 88.
197
Connection Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630
Plug-in base or chassis
K1 K1 K1
X
X
Z
Y
Front connection
Terminals
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders
42 8
(*) P21
P21 E
Z
5 G32
G31
G32
G31
195,5
210,5
X X
(1) For backplate mounting, the insulating screen, supplied
with the plug-in base, must be installed.
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) With spreaders
(*) 94
68
Z
P28
G31
G32
G34 202
X X
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory.
198
Connectors
NS100/160/250 NS400/630
Mounting through backplate or on rails
(*)
109
83
P29
P30
Z
G32
G34
X 66 X
94
Rear connection
Mounting through backplate or on rails
(*) P22 Z
P23
G35 P24
G33 P25
X
5
Mounting on backplate
Right-angle extensions (mounted down and out)
(*) Long, insulated right-angle
P26 Z terminal extensions are
P27 mandatory.
G33
X
Right-angle extensions (mounted up and out)
(*)
P26 Z
P27
E
G35
(*) short terminal shields are mandatory. X
Dimensions (mm)
Type E G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 K1 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30
NS100/160/250N/H/L 4 108.5 100 63.5 110 80.5 35 19 75.5 67 49 57.5 75.5 67 26.5 54.5 36.5
NS400N/H/L 6 171 156.5 104 129 45 26 114.5 100 82 96.5 108.5 94
NS630N/H/L 6 181 166.5 104 129 45 26 124.5 110 92 104.5 108.5 94
199
Connection Compact NS630b to 1600
(fixed version)
Bars
Horizontal rear connection
43,5 70 70 70
15
123
67,5
N Y
X 44
67,5
25 9,5 12,5
123
15 60
12,5
31
2 Ø11
F
Z
43,5
97
X
97
60
12,5
12,5 9,5
31
5 Z
F
2 Ø11
25
44
View A detail
Front connection
163,5
129
X
Top terminal Bottom terminal
129 44
9,5
163,5 25 2 vis M10 15
15
16,5 25 15
2 vis M10 15 9,5
F 44
Z View A detail
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8
Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer
200
Front connection with spreaders
196
181
181
196
31,5
F
Z
Rear connection with spreaders
98 95 95
70 70
123
15
82,5
X 52,5
15
123
95 95
Y
95
5
83
70 70 70
F
Z 12,5 12,5
N Y
Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 13,5
13,5 13,5 13,5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
30 30 30 30
82 52 82 52 15 82 52 15 82 52 15
15
5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11 5 Ø11
25 25 25 25
52 52 52 52
View A detail
Note.
F : Datum X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
201
(fixed version) (cont.)
Bars
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters
200
430
X
200 89 12,5
25 = = 15
21 (1)
101 21
3 Ø11
10
62,5 15 20
F
Z View A detail
Note.
(1) two mounting possibilities for vertical-connection adapters
(pitch 21 mm).
202
Cables with lugs and bare cables
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

15
250
200
530
X 184
17 50 50 50
200
250 80 50
5 Ø13 5 Ø11
View A detail
15
10
150
F
Z
Fixed circuit breaker with 4-cable bare-cable connectors (240 mm 2)
4 Ø21,5
26 63
26
54
203
Bars
Horizontal rear connection
70 70 70
49
15
67,5
228
X N Y
67,5
114
44
25 9,5 12,5
267,5 15
F 60
12,5
2 Ø11
49
97
X
97
60
12,5
5
267,5 12,5 9,5
F
44
25
2 Ø11
View A detail
Front connection
15 12,5
171
336
X Top terminal Bottom terminal
140 44
9,5 25 37,9 9,5
2 Ø11
26
235 83 100
131 52
F
26
2 Ø11
25
9,5
37,9 9,5 44
View A detail
Note.
204
Front connection with spreaders
238
223
207
192
250
F
Spreader detail
Middle left or middle right Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P
spreader for 4P
77 77 77 77
38,5 38,5 38,5 38,5 13,5
13,5 13,5 13,5
25 = = 25 = = 25 = = 25 = =
30 30 30 30
82 52 15
5 Ø11
25
82 52 15
25
5 Ø11
82 52
25
15
5 Ø11
82 52 15
25
5 Ø11 5
52 52 52 52
View A detail
205
(plug-in and withdrawable versions) (cont.)
Cables with lugs
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters

15
50
71
292
21
171
583 184
X 17 50 50 50
140
21 80 50
261
71 5 Ø13 5 Ø11
View A detail
50
193,5 15
F
F : Datum
Note.
X and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device.
206
(fixed version)
Front connection (NS1600b to 2500)
165
150
X
150
165
View A detail
20
F
Z
Front connection with vertical-connection adapters (NS1600b to 2500)
230
142,5
X
Z
142,5 4 Ø11
230
25
25
25
60 100
20
5
25
F 20 12,5 20
40
45 15 25 25
60 80
View A detail
Front connection (NS3200)
230
142,5
X
Z 4 Ø11
142,5
230 25
25 60 100
25
20
20 12,5 20
25
F 45 15 25 25
40
60 80
Note.
Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8 View A detail
207
6
208
Compact NS Electrical diagrams
Presentation 8
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
Compact NSC100, Compact NS80H-MA

Indication contacts 210
Early-make contacts 211
Indication contacts 212
Motor mechanism (automatic reset) 214
Motor mechanism (remote reset) 216
Motor mechanism (local reset) 218
Early-make contacts 220
Motor protection - Trip unit STR22/43ME 222
Fixed circuit breakers 226
Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 228
Communications option 24 V DC external power supply 230
Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection, neutral protection, 232
zone selective interlocking
Fixed circuit breakers 234

209
Electrical diagrams Compact NSC100
Compact NS80H-MA
Indication contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de-

energised, all devices open, connected and
charged and relays in the normal position.
With OF1 and CAO1 With OF1 and CAF1/CAF2
12 14
OF1 CAF1 CAF2
11
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)
With MN With MX
Symbols Colour code for auxiliary wiring

Q Compact NS RD red
SD trip indication contact GN green
OF ON / OFF indication contact BK black
MN undervoltage release BL blue
MX shunt release WH white
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
CAF early-make contact of rotary handle
XI terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered)
F1 breaker for the protection of MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling tripped position
210
Early-make contacts
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, With MN

reset must be carried out locally and
manually.
With MN + SD
(1) independent auxiliary source.

Remark
NS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not plug-in or
withdrawable devices. As a result, there is no automatic
auxiliary connector. Connections are made directly to the
device.
211
Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630
Indication contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Compact NS100 to 250

Manually operated circuit breaker
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)

(2) for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF2 contacts can be installed in the
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism
6
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2)
circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors
(3) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation.
Symbols
Q Compact NS100 to 250
SD trip indication contact
SDE fault indication contact
SDV earth-fault indication contact Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker
OF ON / OFF indication contact
Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
MX shunt release (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
MT motor-mechanism module
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle 11 12 14 21
71
22
72
24
74 24
B4 74 84 D4 14 94
CE connected-position carriage switch 91 92 94 81 82 84 22 82
A1 L1 A4 72 L1 C2 12 92
CD disconnected-position carriage switch
21 81 D1
Colour code for auxiliary wiring A2 71 A1 C1 11 91
RD red
GN green Fixed part (rear view).
BK black
VT violet D1
C1
C2 D4 A2 A4 B4
YE yellow
GY grey Fixed part
BL blue (front view looking into base)
OR orange
WH white
212
Manually operated circuit breaker
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
Circuit breaker with motor mechanism
(1) MN or MX (MN: D1, D4; MX: C1, C2).

6
(3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only.
Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker

Symbols Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors
SD trip indication contact (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2) (wires 0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
31 32 34
SDV earth-fault indication contact e_
11 12 14 21 22 24 71 72 74 T2 24
OF ON / OFF indication contact _
91 92 94 81 82 84 Z11 e+ e
MN undervoltage release A1 L1 T1 22 e+
MX shunt release
MT motor-mechanism module Z12 21 Z11
CAO early-break contact of rotary handle
B4 34 84 D4 14 94
CE connected-position carriage switch 74
CD disconnected-position carriage switch D1 C2 D4 A2 A4 B4 Z12 T1 T2
32 82
C1 R1 R2 A4 C2 12 92
72 L1
Colour code for auxiliary wiring
RD red Fixed part 31 81 D1
A2 71 A1 C1 11 91
GN green (front view looking into base)
BK black
Fixed part (rear view).
VT violet
YE yellow
GY grey
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
213
Motor mechanism
(automatic reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Automatic reset with MN

Following tripping due to an electrical fault,

manually.

(2) the tripping order must lock out the closing order.
Automatic reset with MX
Symbols
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits
H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault
H2 lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position
F closing order
O opening order orders must not be simultaneous
(must be > 150 ms)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
214
Automatic reset without auxiliary
Control via switch or relay

With MN/MX
Controlled by switch Controlled by relay
Without auxiliary
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
82 81 82 81
215
Motor mechanism
(remote reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Remote reset with MN

Following tripping due to an electrical fault,

manually.
Remote reset with MX
6
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct
operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.
Symbols
MX shunt release
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
R reset order
(must be > 150 ms) orders
F closing order must not
O opening order be simultaneous
(must be > 150 ms,
has priority over F order)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
216
Remote reset without auxiliary
(1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct

operation.
(2) connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84.

With MN/MX
Without auxiliary
1 2 F O F O
R R
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
217
Motor mechanism
(local reset)
The diagram is shown with circuits de- Local reset with MN

- CN1 +
charged and relays in the normal position. CN1
CN2 - CN2 –
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, F1

manually.
F O
H1 H2
tripping
order
D1 84 A2 A4 B4
D1 82 84 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT
trip unit
SDE
(2)
MN
(1)
D4 81 A1 L1
D4 A1 L1
Local reset with MX
6
(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical
fault.
Symbols
MX shunt release
F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module
circuits and MN/MX
H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault
F closing order orders
O opening order must not
(must be > 150 ms, be simultaneous
has priority over F order)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
OR orange
WH white
218
Local reset without auxiliary
(1) (2) required to ensure correct indication of an electrical
fault.

With MN/MX
6
Without auxiliary
1 2 F O F O
B2 A2 A4 B4 B2 A2 A4 B4
MT MT
81 81
219
Early-make contacts
The diagram is shown with circuits de- With MN

charged and relays in the normal position. CN1 - CN1 +
(1) tripping
CN2 - CN2 – order
Following tripping due to an electrical fault, X1

reset must be carried out locally and 1 2 3 4 5 6
manually.
D1
D1 C1
Q CAF1 CAF2
trip unit
MN
D4
D4
(1) independent auxiliary source
Symbols
Q Compact NS
SD trip indication contact
XI terminal block for CAF wiring
(must be ordered)
RD red
GN green
BK black
BL blue
WH white
220
With MN + SD
(1) independent auxiliary source
221
Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication
Symbols
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
BL blue
WH white
222
Automatic operation
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time Legend

overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) c O: OFF (circuit open)
IQ closing order for circuit breaker Q c I: ON (circuit closed)
Note. c : either ON or OFF
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens.
The above automatic control sequence is not run.
223
Motor protection
Trip unit STR22/43ME

Thermal-fault indication and tripping
6
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between 22 and A1.
Symbols
F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit
SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal
BP1 SDTAM reset button
KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique
CA...DN31 or CA...DN22
KA2 mechanical latching unit -
Telemecanique LA6 DK1
RHK bistable relay - Telemecanique
RHK-41
H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault
KM1 power contactor
BL blue
WH white
224
Automatic operation
tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time Legend

overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) c O: OFF (circuit open)
Note. c I: ON (circuit closed)
For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens. c : either ON or OFF
The above automatic control sequence is not run.
Same automatic system using a bistable relay
CN1 - CN1 +
CN2 - CN2 –
F1
D1
BP1
D4
E4
C
RHK
6
12 11 14 22 21 24 X
(1)
A1 X1
KM1 H1
A2 X2
(1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between

12 and A1.
225
Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 1600

Power Control unit Remote operation
AT BPO BPF
motor-mechanism
MN MX module
or
– (basic) A Control unit Remote operation
c c E1-E6 communication MN : undervoltage release

or
c Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: MX : shunt release
6 Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE

Z2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)
Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault)
Motor-mechanism module (*)
A4
A2
:
:
electrical opening order
electrical closing order
M1 = Vigi module input B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor
(Micrologic 7)
c T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input (*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(Micrologic 7) (380 V motor + additional resistor)
CN1 - 440/480 V
c F2+, F1- external 24 V DC 9 11
power supply R
A4 A2 B4
–: basic Micrologic control unit
A: digital ammeter
motor-mechanism
module
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V
226
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (manual operation)
E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
OF1
M1M2M3 F1 F2 11 12 14
D1/C1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4
D2/C2 OF2
21 22 24
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
CAF1 CAF2 CAO1 CAO2 81
531 541 511 521 82
532 542 512 522 84

534 544 514 524 SDE
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation)
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts

E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
SDE : fault-trip indication contact
SD :
(short-circuit, overload, earth fault)
trip indication contact

(manual operation)
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5
M1M2 M3 F1 F2
T1 T2 T3 T4
D1/C1
D2/C2 6
CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact
(rotary handle) SDE OF3 OF2 OF1
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact 81 31 21 11

(rotary handle) 82 32 22 12
84 34 24 14
B4 A4 A2 A1
227
Plug-in / withdrawable
circuit breakers

AT BPO BPF
motor-mechanism
MN MX module
or
Control unit Remote operation

Terminal-block marking Com UC1 UC2 UC3 MN / MX MT2 MT1
E5 E6 Z5 M1 M2 M3 F2+ D2 C2 A4 A2
E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 B4
E1 E2 Z1 Z2 T1 T2 F1 – D1 C1 A1
6 c c
c
Com: E1-E6 communication
UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking:

MN
or
MX
:
:
undervoltage release
shunt release
Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE
Z2 = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE Motor-mechanism module (*)
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) MT2 : A4 : electrical opening order
M1 = Vigi module input MT1 : A2 : electrical closing order
(Micrologic 7) B4, A1 :power supply for control devices
c UC2 : T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral; and gear motor (MCH)
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC
(Micrologic 7)
(380 V motor + additional resistor)
c UC3 : F2+, F1- external 24 V DC CN1 - 440/480 V
9 11
power supply
R
A4 A2 B4
–: basic Micrologic control unit
A: digital ammeter
motor-mechanism
module
A1
CN2 - 440/480 V
228
Indication contacts Carriage switches
disconnected connected Test
CT1
CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1

CAF2 CAF1 SDE SD CAO2 CAO1 OF3 OF2 OF1 CD2 CD1 CE3 CE2 CE1 CT1
544 534 84 94 524 514 34 24 14 824 814 334 324 314 914
542 532 82 92 522 512 32 22 12 822 812 332 322 312 912
541 531 81 91 521 511 31 21 11

821 811 331 321 311 911
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : indication contacts

CD2 : disconnected CE3 : connected CT1 : test
CD1 position CE2 position
CE1
position 6
SD : trip indication contact

(manual operation)
CAF2/CAF1 : early-make contact

(rotary handle)
CAO2 / CAO1 : early-break contact

(rotary handle)
Legend
Connected
(only one wire per connection point)
229
Communications option
24 V DC external power supply
Connection of the communications option
motor-mechanism
module
914 812 314 912 812 312
N L1 L2 L3 manual opening order
operation
OF closing order
SDE OF
SD SDE 911 811 311 911 811 311
CT CD CE CT CD CE
+ +
Q B'
A'
Modbus Digipact
I device B COM craddle COM craddle
Micrologic communication A BB
module BB
B' A' B A +
(2)
CCP 303
4
H1 H2
3
BAT
module (1) 2
1
H3 H4
(2)
0
G1G2
24 V
AD 0V
module
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 0V 24 V
L3 L4
+ A B A' B' Modbus 24 VDC 24 VDC
+ / / BB BB + Digipact 1A DC 150
110/240 V AC E3 / E4 twisted pair

24/125 V DC E5 / E6 twisted pair
6
None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is
required for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below.
Circuit breaker Closed Open
Fonction protection no no
Display function no (3) yes
Circuit-breaker status indications and control no no
communications bus
The communications bus requires its own 24 V DC power source (E1, E2). This source is not
the same as the 24 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F2+).
If the 24 V DC external power supply (AD module) is used, the maximum cable length between
(1) Drawout device equipped with Com chassis modbus the 24 V DC external power supply (G1, G2) and the Micrologic control unit (F1-, F2+) is ten
(2) Fixed device or draw-out device without Com chassis metres.
Digipact The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures an
(3) except if current < 20% In uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails.
230
Communication switchboard
This configuration provides remote display and control
of Masterpacts equipped with the Modbus or Digipact
COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with
the Modbus bus.
Software PC running PC running

Micrologic utilities Micrologic utilities
SMS SMS
PLC PLC
TCP/IP
Communication
interface
RS 232C Ethernet
RS 485 RS 485
Bus Modbus Bus Modbus
communication
Bus
Data
DC150
concentrator
Device
UA150
source
change-ower
SC150
contraf
interface
PM150
measure
Compact
COM Digipact
Compact
COM Modbus
PM300
measure Sepam Vigilohm Altivar
6
Digipact Bus Modbus Bus
231
Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection
Neutral protection
Zone selective interlocking
External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protection
Connection of current-transformer secondary

circuit for external neutral
Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A:
c Shielded cable with 2 twisted pairs
c SG1 twisted with SG2
c X1 twisted with X2
c Shielding connected to GND on one end only
c Maximum length 5 metres
c Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm2
c Recommended cable: Belden 9552 or equivalent.
If supply is via the top, follow the shematics.
If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical;
for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source
side, H2 to the load side.
For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault
protection, the current transformer for the external
neutral is not necessary.
External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection
Connection of the secondary circuit

c Unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair
6
Q
I
Micrologic 6
H1 X1 12 5 6 7 10 11
1 MDGF module 9
H2 X2 3 13 14 8
PE
232
Earth-leakage protection
N L1 L2 L3
Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary
circuit
c Unshielded cable with 3 twisted conductors:
v M1, M2, M3 twisted together
I
Micrologic 7
U
M1
M2
M3
Neutral protection
c Three pole circuit breaker:

v Neutral protection is impossible.
c Four pole circuit breaker:
v Compact equipped with Micrologic A
v The current transformer for external neutral is not
necessary.
Zone selective interlocking
A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers

equipped with Micrologic A control units, as illustrated in the
diagram above.
The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and
checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a
6
signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed
for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal
from downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately,
whatever the tripping-delay setting.
Fault 1.
Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no
signal from downstream, it immediately opens in spite of its
tripping delay set to 0.3.
Fault 2.
Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A
receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full
duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does
not receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately,
in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.2.
Note. The maximum permissible distance between two

devices is 3000 metres and the maximum number of devices
is 100.
233

c c E1-E6 communication MN : undervoltage release

or
c Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: MX : shunt release
6 Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE

Z2 = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE
Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time)
M1 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
c T1, T2, T3, T4 = external neutral;
M2, M3 = Vigi module input
(Micrologic 7)
c F2+, F1- external 24 V DC power

supply
: basic Micrologic control unit

A: digital ammeter
234
Indication contacts Terminal-block marking
E6 E5 E4 E3 E2 E1
MN/MX
OF1
11 12 14
M1M2 M3 F1 F2 D1/C1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T2 T3 T4
D2/C2 OF2
21 22 24
OF3
31 32 34
SD
91 92 94
81
82
84
SDE
Indication contacts
OF3 / OF2 / OF1 : ON / OFF indication contacts
SD :
trip indication contact 6
235
7
236
Compact NS Additional characteristics
Presentation 8
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
Tripping curves
Compact NSC100 238
Compact NS80H-MA 239
Compact NS100 to 250 protection of distribution systems 240
Compact NS100 to 250 motor-starter protection 243
Compact NS400 to 630 protection of distribution systems 244
Compact NS400 to 630 motor-starter protection 245
Compact NS630b to 3200 246
Reflex tripping 247
Current-limiting curves 248

237
Additional characteristics Tripping curves
Compact NSC100
16…40 A
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
1
16A : Im = 37,5 x In
.5
20A : Im = 30 x In
.2 25A : Im = 24 x In
.1 32A : Im = 19 x In
.05 40A : Im = 15 x In
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir
50…80 A 100 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
7 1
.5
.2
50A : Im = 20 x In
63A : Im = 16 x In
1
.5
.2
100A : Im = 12,5 x In
70A : Im = 14,3 x In
.1 .1
80A : Im = 12,5 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
238
Compact NS80H-MA
MA1.5…MA80
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
t(s)
2
Im = 6…14 x In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200300
I / Ir
239
Protection of distribution systems
TM magnetic trip units

TM16D / TM16G TM25D / TM25G
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM16D : 12 x In TM25D : 12 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
TM16G : 4 x In TM25G :
.1 .1 3.2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping: .01 reflex tripping:
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
TM32D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G

10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
7
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
TM40D : 12 x In TM63D : 8 x In
1 1
.5 .5
TM50D : 10 x In
.2 TM32D : 12,5 x In .2
TM40G : TM63G :
.1 2 x In .1 2 x In
.05 .05
.02 .02
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
240
TM magnetic trip units (cont.)
TM80D / TM100D TM125D / TM160D
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5 TM125D
t(s) t(s) 10 x In
2 2
NS160/250
1 Im = 12,5 x In 1
.5 .5 TM160D
NS100 8 x In
.2 .2
Im = 8 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
TM200D / TM250D
10 000
5 000
2 000
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
7
10
5
t(s)
2
Im = 5 … 10 x In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 reflex tripping:
t < 10 ms
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir
241
Protection of distribution systems (cont.)
STR22SE and STR22GE electronic trip units

STR22SE - 40…100 A STR22SE - 160…250 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 2…10 x Ir Im = 2…10 x Ir
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping: reflex tripping:
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
STR22GE - 40…100 A STR22GE - 160…250 A

10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
Ir = 0.4…1 x In
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
7
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
1 1
.5 .5
Im = 2…10 x Ir
.2 .2
Im = 2…10 x Ir
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping: reflex tripping:
.01 t < 10 ms .01 t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 I = 11 x In .002 I = 11 x In
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
242
Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic trip units

MA2,5…MA100 MA150 and MA220
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500 thermal withstand
MA220
200 200
MA150
100 thermal withstand 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2
Im = 6 …14 x In Im = 9 …14 x In
1 1
.5 .5
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
.01 reflex tripping : .01 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / In
STR22ME electronic trip units

STR22ME - 10…220 A
10 000
5 000
2 000 Ir
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
class 10 (IEC 60947-4)
7
t(s)
2
1
.5
Im = 13 x Ir
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
.005
.002 I = 15 x In
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir
243
Protection of distribution systems
STR23 and STR53 electronic trip units

STR23SE / STR23SV STR53UE / STR53SV
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
Ir = 0.4…1 x In Ir = 0.4…1 x In
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50 tr = 0.5…16 s
20 20
Ii = 1.5…11 x In
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s) Isd = 1.5…10 x Ir
2 2
I2t ON
Isd = 2…10 x Ir 1
1
.5 .5
0.3
.2 .2
0.2
.1 .1 i 2 t OFF 0.1
.05 .05
0
.02 .02
reflex tripping:
.01 t < 10 ms .01
.005 .005 reflex tripping :
t < 10 ms
.002 I = 11 x In .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 5 7 10 20 30 50
I / Ir I / Ir I / In
Options for STR53UE

Earth-fault protection
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = 0.2…1 x In
1 000
500
200
100
50
20
7 t(s)
10
5
2
I2t ON
1
.5 0.4
0.3
.2 0.2
.1 I2t OFF 0.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.05.07.1 .2 .3 .4.5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 20 30
I / In
244
Motor-starter protection
MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units

MA320…MA500 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 A
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 thermal withstand 100
50 50
class 10 A
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
2 2 hot tripping curve
1 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
Im = 9 ... 14 x In
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 .02
reflex tripping
.01 reflex tripping : .01 t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 .002 Ii = 10,4 x In

.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / In I / Ir
STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 10 STR43ME - 120 to 500 A - class 20
10 000 10 000
5 000 5 000
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 100
class 20
50 classe 10 50
20 20
t(s)
10
5
2 hot tripping curve

t(s)
10
5
2 hot tripping curve

7
1 cold tripping curve 1 cold tripping curve
.5 .5
Isd = 6…13 x Ir Isd = 6…13 x Ir
.2 .2
.1 .1
.05 .05
.02 reflex .02

reflex tripping
.01 tripping .01 t < 10 ms
t < 10 ms
.005 .005
.002 Ii = 10,4 x In .002 Ii = 10,4 x In

.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300
I / Ir I / Ir
Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuit
breakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65° C.
245
Micrologic electronic control units

Micrologic 2.0 Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, 7.0 - Micrologic 5.0A, 6.0A, 7.0A
10 000 10 000
5 000 Ir = 0,4…1 x In 5 000 Ir = 0,4…1 x In
2 000 2 000
1 000 1 000
500 500
200 200
100 tr = 0,5...24 s 100 tr = 0,5…24 s
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
t(s) t(s)
Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir
2 2
Isd = 1,5…10 x Ir
1 1
I2 t ON
.5 .5 0,4 0,4
0,3 0,3
.2 .2 0,2 0,2
0,1 2 0,1
.1 .1 I t OFF
0 0
.05 .05
.02 Ii = 2…15 x In . OFF

.02
.01 .01
.005 .005
.002 .002
.001 .001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 300 .5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 3 5 7 10 20 30
I / Ir x Ir x In
Options for Micrologic electronic control units

Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0)
10 000
5 000
2 000
Ig = A…J x In (1)
1 000 1200 A max.
500
200
100
50
7 t(s)
20
10
5
I2t ON
2
1
.5 0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
.2 0.2 0.2
2 0.1 0.1
.1 It OFF
0 0
.05
.02
.01
.005 (1)
.002 Ig = In x… A B C D E F G H J
.001 Ig < 400 A 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
.05.07 .1 .2 .3 .4.5 .7 1 2 3 5 7 10 200 300 400 A i Ig i 1200 A 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
I / In Ig > 1200 A 500 640 720 800 880 960 1040 1120 1200
246
Reflex tripping
Compact NS100 to 630 devices TM160D...TM250D

STR22SE250
incorporate the exclusive reflex-tripping
20
system.
This system breaks very high fault currents
by mechanically tripping the device via a
STR22SE160
"piston" actuated directly by the pressure
produced in the breaking units resulting
from a short-circuit. 10 TM160D
For high short-circuits, this system provides

8
a faster break and a trip guarantee, as well t TM16D...TM100D
(ms) 7
as natural total discrimination. STR22SE40... 100
Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively a 6
function of the circuit-breaker frame 5

rating.
4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200
kA rms
247
Additional characteristics Current-limiting curves
The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is Ics = 100% Icu

its aptitude to limit short-circuit currents. The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces the
forces created by fault currents in devices.
The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the service
Isc breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu.
prospective The Ics value, defined by IEC standard 60947-2, is guaranteed by tests comprising
Isc peak the following operations:
prospective c Break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100% of Icu
current
c Check that the device continues to function normally:
v It conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise
prospective
Isc
v Protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard
v Suitability for isolation is not impaired.
limited Isc
peak
actual Longer service life of electrical installations
current Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits
limited
Isc on installations.
Thermal effects
tc t
Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables.
The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range is Mechanical effects
due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or bus
repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages bars being deformed or broken.
in-series with a very steep wave front).
Electromagnetic effects
Less disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits.
Economy by means of cascading

Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with
breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed
downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the
limiting capacity of the upstream device.
It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and
enclosures.
Current-limiting curves
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which
are a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow
if no protection devices were installed):
c The actual peak current (limited current),
c Thermal stress (A2 s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a
conductor with a resistance of 1 Ω.
Example
What is the real value of a 150 kA rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 kA peak)
limited by an NS250L upstream ?
Answer: 30 kA peak (see next page).
Maximum permissible cable stresses

The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables
depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area
(CSA). CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2s.
7 CSA (mm 2)
PVC Cu
PRC Cu
Al
1.5
2.97x10 4
4.10x10 4
2.5
8.26x10 4
1.39x10 5
4
2.12x10 5
2.92x10 5
6
4.76x10 5
6.56x10 5
10
1.32x10 6
5.41x10 5
1.82x10 6
Al 7.52x10 5
CSA (mm 2) 16 25 35 50
PVC Cu 3.4x10 6 8.26x10 6 1.62x10 7 3.31x10 7
Al 1.39x10 6 3.38x10 6 6.64x10 6 1.35x10 7
PRC Cu 4.69x10 6 1.39x10 7 2.23x10 7 4.56x10 7
Al 1.93x10 6 4.70x10 6 9.23x10 6 1.88x10 7
Example
Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm2 adequately protected by an NS160N?
The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.32x106 A2s.
All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu = 35 kA) is installed are
limited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 105 A2s (see next page).
Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the
circuit breaker.
248
Current-limiting curves
Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
300 300
NS630bH
NS800H
200 NS630bN NS1000H 200
NS800N NS1250H NS630bH
NS1000N NS1600H NS800H
NS1250N NS1000H
NS1600N NS630bN
100 NS630bL 100 NS1250H
NS800N NS1600H
NS800L
80 NS1000L
80 NS1000N
70 70 NS1250N
60 60 NS1600N
50 NS630 50 NS630bL
H NS400 NS800L
kA peak40
L
kA peak40 N
L
NS1000L NS630 NS400
TC150/250/400
NS250 H
30 H NS160
30
NS100
N NS100
20 TM32...250 20 N L
NS250 TM40…100
TM25 TM 25
N NH NS160
TM16
TM 16
10 10
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 200 300
kA rms kA rms
Thermal-stress curves
Voltage 380/415 V AC Voltage 660/690 V AC
9 9
10 10
5 5
3 NS630bH 3
NS800H
2 NS630bN NS1000H 2
NS800N NS1250H NS630bH
8 8
10 NS1000N NS1600H 10 NS800H
NS1250N NS1000H
NS1600N NS1250H
NS630bN
5 5 NS800N NS1600H
NS1000N
3 3 NS1250N
2 2 NS1600N
7 7
10 NS1000L
10 NS630bL
NS800L
2 NS630bL 2 NS1000L
As 5 L NS800L As 5 H NS630
H L L NS400
N NS630
3 L 3 H
TC150/250/400
N
N H NS400
2 2
N L
6 6
10
7
H L 10 NS250
NS250 H NS100
NS160 N TM 40…100
NS160
5 NS100
TM32…250
5
N
3 3 TM 25
TM25
2 2 TM 16
5 5
10 TM16 10
5 5
3 3
2 2
2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 150 200 300 2 3 4 6 10 20 30 40 60 100 150 200 300
kA rms kA rms
249
8
250
Compact NS Catalogue numbers
Presentation 8
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
NS80HMA 252
NSC100N 253
NS100 - 250 254
NS400 - 630 266
NS630b - 1600 fixed manually operated 275
NS630b - 1600 fixed electrically operated 277
Accessories for NS630b - 1600 fixed devices 279
NS630b - 1600 manually operated
withdrawable devices 281
NS630b - 1600 electrically operated
Accessories for NS630b - 1600
Common accessories for NS630b - 1600
NS1600b - 3200 fixed, front connected,
manually operated device 287
Accessories for NS1600b - 3200 288
Communication bus accessories and
display modules 289
NS100 to NS630 source changeover 291
251
Catalogue numbers Compact NS80H-MA
(70 kA at 380-415 V)
Complete device
Compact NS80H-MA with built-in trip unit MA
Compact NS80H-MA fixed/FC

rating 3P 3t
MA1.5 28106
MA2.5 28105
MA6.3 28104
MA12.5 28103
MA25 28102
MA50 28101
MA80 28100
Accessories
long terminal shields (1 pair)
Connection accessories 3P 28034
auxiliary switch (changeover)

Electrical auxiliaries OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
voltage releases
AC voltage MX MN
42 V 50 Hz 28069
48 V 50 Hz 28070 28080
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 28071 28081
208 V 60 Hz 28067 28089
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 28072 28082
277 V 60 Hz 28068 28090
380-415 V 50 Hz 28073 28083
440-480 V 50/60 Hz 28074 28084
DC voltage MX MN
24 V 28075 28085
48 V 28076 28086
110-125 V 28077 28087
250 V 28078 28088
MN 220-240 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29421
composed of: MN 250 V DC 28088
delay unit 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
Operating handles standard black handle 28050
red handle on yellow front 28051
MCC conversion accessory 28054
extended rotary handle

standard extended rotary handle 28052
indication auxiliary
2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
8 flange mounted operating handle

cable operated mechanism for flange handle
cable length 914mm
cable length1524mm
cable length 3048mm
36020
36021
36022
flange handle
grey paint finish 37003
chrome finish 37004
removable locking device for 3 padlocks 29370
Miscellaneous 100 identification labels 29314
DIN rail plate 28040
252
Compact NSC100N
Complete device
Compact NSC100N with built-in trip unit
Compact NSC100N fixed/FC
rating 3P 3t
TM16D 28120
TM20D 28121
TM25D 28122
TM32D 28123
TM40D 28124
TM50D 28125
TM63D 28126
TM70D 28127
TM80D 28128
TM100D 28129
Accessories
long terminal shields (1 pair)
3P 28034

Connection accessories OF or SD 29450
OF or SD low level 29452
voltage releases
Electrical auxiliaries AC voltage MX MN
42 V 50 Hz 28069
48 V 50 Hz 28070 28080
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 28071 28081
208 V 60 Hz 28067 28089
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 28072 28082
277 V 60 Hz 28068 28090
380-415 V 50 Hz 28073 28083
440-480 V 50/60 Hz 28074 28084
DC voltage MX MN
24 V 28075 28085
48 V 28076 28086
110-125 V 28077 28087
250 V 28078 28088
direct rotary handles
Rotary handles standard black handle 28050
extended rotary handles

2 early make contacts 28055
1 early-break contact 28056
wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) 29336
flange mounted operating handle

cable operated mechanism for flange handle
cable length 914mm 36020
cable length1524mm 36021
flange handle
cable length 3048mm
grey paint finish

chrome finish
36022
37003
37004
8
45mm standard front face 28039
Miscellaneous DIN rail plate 28040
100 labels 29314
removable locking device for 3 padlocks 29370
253
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P
Complete device
Compact NS100/160N 1P/2P, NS250 1P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100N
rating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V) 2P 2d (Icu=85 kA at 220/240 V and 25 kA at 380/415 V)
TM16D 29585 29605
TM20D 29588 29608
TM25D 29584 29604
TM30D 29587 29607
TM40D 29583 29603
TM50D 29586 29606
TM63D 29582 29602
TM80D 29581 29601
TM100D 29580 29600
Compact NS160N
TM125D 30581 30601
TM160D 30580 30600
Compact NS250N
rating 1P 1d (Icu=25 kA at 220/240 V)
TM160D 31582
TM200D 31581
TM250D 31580
Compact NS160N/160H 1P/2P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100H
TM16D 29595 29615
TM20D 29598 29618
TM25D 29594 29614
TM30D 29597 29617
TM40D 29593 29613
TM50D 29596 29616
TM63D 29592 29612
TM80D 29591 29611
TM100D 29590 29610
Compact NS160H
TM125D 30590 30611
TM160D 30589 30610
254
Compact NS100/160/250N/H 1P/2P
Accessories
Accessories
auxiliary switch (changeover) 29450
Electrical auxiliaries OF or SD
Two pole only
voltage releases
AC 50/60 Hz (V) MX MN
24 29384 29404
48 29385 29405
110/130 29386 29406
200/240 29387 29407
380/440 29388 29408
OF = breaker open/close 525 (50 Hz) 29389 29409
SD = alarm switch DC (V) MX MN
12 29382 29402
24 29390 29410
30 29391 29411
48 29392 29412
125 29393 29413
250 29394 29414
MN with time delay = MN 250 V CC 29414
220/240 V CA + time delay unit 220/240 V 50/60Hz 29427
rear connections
Connection accessories 2 short 29235
2 long 29236
bare cable connectors

snap-on, for cable 1,5 to 95 ❏ ; ≤ 160 A set of 2 29246
snap-on, for cable 10 to 185 ❏ ; ≤ 250 A set of 2 29247
pads
right-angle terminal extensions set of 2 29250
straight terminal extensions set of 2 29251
terminal shields
short (1 pair) 1P 29320
short (2 pairs) 2P (2x) 29320
toggle locking device for 3 padlocks
Locks removable 29370
front-panel escutcheons
Installation accessories with toggles 29315
255
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100N
(25 kA at 380/415 V)
Compact NS160/250N
(36 kA at 380/415 V)
Complete device
Compact NS100/160/250N with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100N fixed/FC

rating 2P* 3P 4P
TM16D 29625 29635 29645
TM25D 29624 29634 29644
TM32D 29627 29637 29647
TM40D 29623 29633 29643
TM50D 29626 29636 29646
TM63D 29622 29632 29642
TM80D 29621 29631 29641
TM100D 29620 29630 29640

rating 2P* 3P 4P
TM80D 30623 30633 30643
TM100D 30622 30632 30642
TM125D 30621 30631 30641
TM160D 30620 30630 30640

rating 2P* 3P 4P
TM125D 31623 31633 31643
TM160D 31622 31632 31642
TM200D 31621 31631 31641
TM250D 31620 31630 31640
Compact NS100/160/250N with electronic trip unit STR22SE

rating 3P 4P
40 29772 29782
100 29770 29780

rating 3P 4P
40 30773 30783
100 30771 30781
160 30770 30780

rating 3P 4P
100 31772 31782
250 31770 31780
* 3 pole frame size
TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have a
combined single reference for the frame and trip
unit, they are detailed as a separate frame and trip
on page .
256
Compact NS100/160/250H
(70 kA at 380/415 V)
Complete device
Compact NS100/160/250H with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100H fixed/FC
rating 3P 4P
TM16D 29675 29685
TM25D 29674 29684
TM32D 29677 29687
TM40D 29673 29683
TM50D 29676 29686
TM63D 29672 29682
TM80D 29671 29681
TM100D 29670 29680

rating 3P 4P
TM80D 30673 30683
TM100D 30672 30682
TM125D 30671 30681
TM160D 30670 30680

rating 3P 4P
TM125D 31673 31683
TM160D 31672 31682
TM200D 31671 31681
TM250D 31670 31680
Compact NS100/160/250H with electronic trip unit STR22SE

rating 3P 4P
40 29792 29802
100 29790 29800

rating 3P 4P
40 30793 30803
100 30791 30801
160 30790 30800

rating 3P 4P
100 31792 31802
250 31790 31800
on page 259.
257
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/250L
(150 kA at 380/415 V)
Compact NS100/160/250NA
switch-disconnector
Complete device
Compact NS100/160/250L with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D
Compact NS100L fixed/FC
rating 3P 4P
TM16D 29715 29725
TM25D 29714 29724
TM32D 29717 29727
TM40D 29713 29723
TM50D 29716 29726
TM63D 29712 29722
TM80D 29711 29721
TM100D 29710 29720

rating 3P 4P
TM80D 30713 30723
TM100D 30712 30722
TM125D 30711 30721
TM160D 30710 30720

rating 3P 4P
TM125D 31713 31723
TM160D 31712 31722
TM200D 31711 31721
TM250D 31710 31720
Compact NS100/160/250L with electronic trip unit STR22SE

rating 3P 4P
40 29812 29822
100 29810 29820

rating 3P 4P
40 30813 30823
100 30811 30821
160 30810 30820

rating 3P 4P
100 31812 31822
250 31810 31820
on page 259.
Complete device
Compact NS100/160/250NA switch-disconnector
Compact NS100NA fixed/FC

rating 3P 4P
100 29629 29639
Compact NS160NA fixed/FC

rating 3P 4P
160 30629 30639
8 Compact NS250NA
rating
250
3P
31629
fixed/FC
4P
31639
For 1 sec and 3 sec short time withstand current
(Icw) please refer to page 60.
258
Compact NS100/160/250N/H/L
Vigicompact NS100/160/250N/H/L
Comprising:
fixed/FC basic frame
2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
NS100N 29000 29003 29008
NS100H 29004 29009
NS100L 29005 29010
NS160N 30400 30403 30408
NS160H 30404 30409
NS160L 30405 30410
NS250N 31400 31403 31408
NS250H 31404 31409
NS250L 31405 31410
+ trip unit
standard protection: trip unit TM-D
rating 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
TM16D 29025 29035 29045
TM25D 29024 29034 29044
TM32D 29027 29037 29047
TM40D 29023 29033 29043
TM50D 29026 29036 29046
TM63D 29022 29032 29042
TM80D (1) 29021 29031 29041
TM100D (1) 29020 29030 29040
TM80D (2) 30423 30433 30443
TM100D (2) 30422 30432 30442
TM125D 30421 30431 30441
TM160D (3) 30420 30430 30440
TM160D (4) 31422 31432 31442
TM200D 31421 31431 31441
TM250D 31420 31430 31440
standard protection: electronic trip unit SE
rating 3P 4P
STR22SE - 40 A (5) 29072 29082
STR22SE - 100 A (5) 29070 29080
STR22SE - 160 A (2) 30470 30480
STR22SE - 250 A (4) 31470 31480
type G protection: trip unit TM-G
rating 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
TM16G (5) 29145 29155 29165
TM25G (5) 29144 29154 29164
TM40G (5) 29143 29153 29163
TM63G (5) 29142 29152 29162
type G protection: electronic trip unit GE
rating 3P 4P
STR22GE - 40 A (5) 29076 29086
STR22GE - 100 A (5) 29075 29085
STR22GE - 160 A (2) 30475 30485
STR22GE - 250 A (4) 31475 31485
motor protection: trip unit MA
rating 3P 4P
MA2.5 (5) 29125
MA6.3 (5) 29124
MA12.5 (5) 29123
MA25 (5) 29122
MA50 (5) 29121
MA100 (5) 29120 29130
MA150 (2) 30500 30510
MA220 (4) 31500 31510
motor protection: electronic trip unit ME
rating 3P
STR22ME - 10 A (5) 29177
STR22ME - 12.5 A (5) 29176
STR22ME - 20 A (5) 29175
STR22ME - 25 A (5)
STR22ME - 40 A (5)
STR22ME - 50 A (5)
STR22ME - 80 A (5)
29174
29173
29172
29171
8
STR22ME - 100 A (5) 29170
STR22ME - 150 A (2) 30520
STR22ME - 220 A (4) 31520
options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/CC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC 29430
(1) for NS100 switch-disconnector NA
(2) for NS160/250 2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
(3) for NS160 NA (1) 29200 29201 29202
(4) for NS250 NA (2) 30456 30456 30457
(5) for NS100/160/250
259
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/250N/H/L
+ Vigi module
3P 4P
ME type for NS100/160 29212 29213
MH type for NS100/160 (220 to 440 V) 29210 29211
MH type for NS250 (220 to 440 V) 31535 31536
MH type for NS100/160 (440 to 550 V) 29215 29216
MH type for NS250 (440 to 550 V) 31533 31534
connection for a 4P Vigi 29214
on a 3P breaker
260
Fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + RC kit

3P 4P
short RC kit 29237 29238
comprising:
short RCs 3P 3x 29235
4P 4x 29235
3P 4P
mixed RC kit 29239 29240
comprising:
kit 3P short RCs 2x 29235
long RCs 1x 29236
long RCs 2x 29236
Plug-in configuration = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit

2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
kit for Compact 29288 29289 29290
comprising:
base 2P 1x 29265
3P 1x 29266
4P 1x 29267
safety trip 3P/4P 1x 29270
short terminal shields 3P 1x 29321
4P 1x 29322
power connections 2P 2x 29268
3P 3x 29268
4P 4x 29268
3P 4P
kit for Vigicompact 29291 29292
comprising:
base 3P 1x 29266
4P 1x 29267
4P 1x 29322
4P 4x 29269
insulation accessories
3P 4P
long terminal shields kit for plug-in base 29332 29333
comprising:
adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 29306
4P (1 pair) 1x 29307
long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x 29308
4P (1 pair) 1x 29309
phase barriers kit for plug-in base 29334 29311
comprising:
4P (1 pair) 1x 29307
phase barriers set of 6 1x 29328
Withdrawable configuration = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit

2P (3P frame) 3P 4P
kit for Compact 29298 29299 29300
comprising:
plug-in kit 2P 1x 29288
3P 1x 29289
4P 1x 29290
fixed part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1x 29282
moving part of chassis 2P/3P/4P 1x 29283
3P 4P
comprising:
fixed part of chassis

moving part of chassis
4P
3P/4P
3P/4P
1x
1x
1x
29292
29282
29283 8
261
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/250N/H/L
Accessories
rear connections
Connection accessories 2 short 60mm 29235
(Cu or Al) 2 long 115mm 29236

1.5 to 95mm ; ≤ 160 A set of 3
2
snap-on, 29242
for cable : set of 4 29243
10 to 185mm ; ≤ 250 A set of 3
2
29259
set of 4 29260
2
voltage plug for 185mm bare cable connectorset of 2 29348
clips for bare-cable connector set of 10 29241
distribution connectors set of 3 29248
2
for six 1.5 to 35mm cables set of 4 29249
with phase barriers
"Polybloc" terminal block (for bare cable)
160 A (40 °C) 6 cables S ≤ 10mm
2
7100
250 A (40 °C) 9 cables S ≤ 10mm
2
7101
terminal extensions
set of 4 29262
straight terminal extensions set of 3 29263
set of 4 29264
spreaders 3P 31563
4P 31564
supplied with 2 (or 3) phase barriers
shrouded neutral link
250A NSNL250
crimp lugs for copper cable
2
for cable 120mm set of 3 29252
set of 4 29256
2
set of 4 29257
2
set of 4 29258
crimp lugs for aluminium cable
2
set of 4 29505
2
set of 4 29507
terminal shields
short (1 pair) 3P 29321
4P 29322
long (1 pair) 3P 29323

4P 29324
insulation kit U 600 V

(long terminal shields 3P 29326
+ insulating screens) 4P 29327
phase barriers set of 6 29329
2 insulating screens (fixed breaker) 3P 29330

4P 29331
test kits
Test kits mini test kit 43362
8 portable test kit

wiring kit (spare part)
34547
34546
262
Accessories
Electrical auxiliaries OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
SDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA 29451
voltage releases
AC voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 29384 29404
48 V 50/60 Hz 29385 29405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29386 29406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29387 29407
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50 Hz 29388 29408
440-480 V 60 Hz
525 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz 29389 29409
DC voltage MX MN
12 V 29382 29402
24 V 29390 29410
30 V 29391 29411
48 V 29392 29412
60 V 29383 29403
125 V 29393 29413
250 V 29394 29414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29420
delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
delay unit of 220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
motor mechanism modules
AC voltage MT100/160 MT250
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 29440 31548
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29433 31540
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29434 31541
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50/60 Hz 29435 31542
440-480 V 60 Hz
DC voltage MT100/160 MT250
24-30 V 29436 31543
48-60 V 29437 31544
110-130 V 29438 31545
250 V 29439 31546
communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers
LV installation control and OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switches for Compact 29453
monitoring NS100/160/250 (the SDE adapter SDE for thermal-magnetic
trip units is included)
communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switches

for Compact NS circuit breakers
"connected /disconnected" position indication switches 29296
for Compact NS100/250
motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers

29441
MT100/160 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE
for Compact NS100/160 31549
MT250 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE
for Compact NS250
ammeter module
Indication and rating (A) 100 160
30555 250
3P . 30556 31565
measurement modules 4P
29455
29456 . 31566
8
ammeter module I max.
rating (A) 100 160
34850 250
3P 34849 . 34851
current transformer module
rating (A) 100 150
30557 250
3P 29457 . 30558 31567
4P 29458 . 31568
insulation monitoring module

3P 29459
4P 29460
voltage presence indicator

29325
263
Catalogue numbers
Accessories
direct rotary handles
standard extended rotary handle

telescopic handle for withdrawable device 29343
accessories
indication 1 early-break swith 29345
auxiliary 2 early-make switches 29346
early-make wiring terminal 29336
cable operated mechanism for flange handles
Flange mounted cable for 3 pole breakers cable length 914mm 37005
operating handles cable length 1524mm 37006
37007
cable length 3048mm
for 4 pole breakers cable length 914mm 37010
flange handle
chrome finish 37004
toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
Locks by removable device 29370
by fixed device 29371
locking of the rotary handle

keylock adapter (keylock not included) 29344
keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500 41940
not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42888
locking of the motor mechanism modules

keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) 29449
interlocking mechanical for circuit breakers

Interlocking with toggles 29354
* Locking device 29344 is required in combination with
Ronis or Profolux keylocks - one per lock.
with rotary handles 29369
** Requires Castell lock type K form 4,
Bolt projection = 19mm.
Initial projection is flush. interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles
keylock adapter (keylock not included) 29344 (1)
1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500 41950*
keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878*
(1) for only 1 device
castell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle 92325**
front-panel escutcheons
Installation accessories toggle 29315
Vigi module 29316
rotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40 29317
Vigi module or ammeter IP405 29318
toggle cover IP43 29319

sealing accessories 29375
DIN rail adapter 29305
264
Accessories
auxiliary connections
Plug-in/withdrawable 1 9-wire fixed connector (for base) 29273
configuration accessories 1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker)
1 support for 2 moving connectors
29274
29275
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving) 29272
plug-in base accessories
long insulated terminals set of 3 29276
set of 4 29277
2 IP4 shutters for base 29271
chassis accessories
extended escutcheon toggle 29284
Vigi module 29285
locking devices (keylock not included) 29286
2 position indicating switches (connected/disconnected) 29287
parts of plug-in kit
plug-in base FC/RC 2P 29265
3P 29266
4P 29267
set of 2 power connections for standard 29268
Vigi module 29269
safety trip for advanced opening 29270
parts of withdrawable kit
fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 29282
moving part (for circuit breaker) 29283
10 lever extensions 29313

Spare parts spare screws 29312
12 snap-in nuts (fixed/FC)
M6 for NS100N/H/L 29234
M8 for NS160/250N/H/L 30554
100 identification labels 29314
sheet-metal enclosure IP40 for
Individual enclosures Compact NS100/160/250 MGE1
Vigicompact NS100/160/250 MGE1E
Cable extension box NS100/160 MGEX160
Cable extension box NS250 MGEX250
265
Catalogue numbers Compact NS400/630N
(45 kA at 380/415 V)
Compact NS400/630H
Applications above 525V - consult us. (70 kA at 380/415 V)
Complete device
Compact NS400/630N with electronic trip unit
STR23SE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400N fixed/FC 150 A 32719 32720
250 A 32707 32708
400 A 32693 32694
Compact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32893 32894
STR53UE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400N fixed/FC 150 A 32725 32726
250 A 32713 32714
400 A 32699 32700
Compact NS630N fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32899 32900
Compact NS400/630H with electronic trip unit

STR23SE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400H fixed/FC 150 A 32721 32722
250 A 32709 32710
400 A 32695 32696
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32895 32896
STR53UE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400H fixed/FC 150 A 32727 32728
250 A 32715 32716
400 A 32701 32702
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32901 32902
266
Compact NS400/630L
(150 kA at 380/415 V)
Applications above 525V - consult us.
Complete device
Compact NS400/630L with electronic trip unit
STR23SE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400L fixed/FC 150 A 32723 32724
250 A 32711 32712
400A 32697 32698
Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32897 32898
STR53UE (U i 525 V)
3P 4P
Compact NS400L fixed/FC 150 A 32729 32730
250 A 32717 32718
400A 32703 32704
Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32903 32904
Compact NS400/630H/L with electronic trip unit MA for motor protection

MA320
3P
Compact NS400H fixed/FC 32750
Compact NS400L fixed/FC 32751
MA500
3P
Compact NS630H fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32950
Compact NS630L fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32951
267
Catalogue numbers Compact NS400/630H
(70 kA at 380/415 V)
Compact NS400/630NA
(switch-disconnector)
Complete device
Compact NS400/630H with trip unit MP for DC applications
MP1
3P
MP2
3P
MP3
3P
Compact NS400/630NA switch-disconnector

3P 4P
Compact NS400NA fixed/FC 32756 32757
Compact NS630NA fixed/FC, 45 mm pitch 32956 32957
Compact NS400N 1000 V (10 kA at 1150 V)

Compact equipped with insulation kit
STR23SP
3P
Compact NS400N 1000 V fixed/FC 150 A 32672
250 A 32671
400A 32670
268
Comprising :
3P 4P
NS400N 32403 32408
NS400H 32404 32409
NS400L 32405 32410
NS630N 32803 32808
NS630H 32804 32809
NS630L 32805 32810
+ trip unit
electronic trip units STR23SE
3P, 4P
STR23SE (U i 525 V) 32420
electronic trip units STR53UE (basic offer)

3P, 4P
STR53UE F (U i 525 V) 32424
electronic trip unit STR53UE (with options)

3P, 4P
STR53UE FT (U i 525 V) 32425
STR53UE FI (U i 525 V) 32426
STR53UE FTI (U i 525 V) 32427
options: ZSI wiring 32442
COM wiring 32441
electronic trip unit STR43ME
3P, 3t,
STR43ME F 32430
options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC 29430
STR43ME FI 32431
options: SDTAM 110/240 V AC/DC 29424
SDTAM 24/48 V AC / 24/72 V DC 29430
COM wiring 32441
Exchange battery option for STR53UE or STR43ME 32434
+ Vigi module
3P 4P
type MB 220 to 440 V 32455 32456
440 to 550 V 32453 32454
connection for a 4P Vigi 32457
on a 3P breaker
NS 400 extension with 150 and 250 A ratings:

3P 4P
NS400N 150 A 32382 32387
250 A 32392 32397
NS400H 150 A 32383 32388
250 A 32393 32398
NS400L 150 A 32384 32389
250 A 32394 32399
All the above trip units can be included in this offer.
Note: The frame and the trip are supplied factory assembled as are the trip unit options, whereas the Vigi modules are supplied as loose items.
8
269
Catalogue numbers Compact NS400/630N/H/L
fixed/RC device = fixed/FC device + RC kit

3P 4P
mixed RC kit 32477 . 32478
comprising:
long RCs 1x 32476
long RCs 2x 32476
fixed/FC configuration 52.5 mm or 70 mm pitch = fixed FC configuration 45 mm pitch + spreaders

Pitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630/N/H/L is 45 mm.
A set of spreaders is available for connection: fixed front connections or withdrawable with pitch of 52.5 mm or 70 mm.
upline or downline clearance
52.5 mm 3P 32490
4P 32491
70 mm 3P 32492
4P 32493
plug-in configuration = fixed/FC device + plug-in kit

3P 4P
kit for Compact 32538 32539
comprising:
base 3P 1x 32516
4P 1x 32517
4P 1x 32563
4P 4x 32518
3P 4P
comprising:
base 3P 1x 32516
4P 1x 32517
4P 1x 32563
4P 4x 32519
withdrawable configuration = fixed/FC device + withdrawable kit

3P 4P
kit for Compact 32542 32543
comprising:
4P 1x 32539
fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32532
moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32533
3P 4P
comprising:
4P 1x 32541
fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32532
moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 32533
insulation accessories
8 long terminal shields kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configuration
comprising:
adapter 3P (1 pair)
3P
32588
1x
4P
32589
32584
4P (1 pair) 1x 32585
long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x 32586
4P (1 pair) 1x 32587
3P 4P
phase barriers kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configuration 32591 32592
comprising:
4P (1 pair) 1x 32585
phase barriers set of 6 1x 32571
Note: If any internal accessories are required for plug-ins and withdrawable devices, add the necessary auxiliary connections (see plug-in/withdrawable configuration accessories.
270
Compact NS400/630N/H/L
Accessories
rear connections
Connection accessories 2 short 32475
(Cu or Al) 2 long 32476

for 1 cable from set of 3 32479
2
35 to 300mm set of 4 32480
for 2 cable from set of 3 32481

2
85 to 240mm set of 4 32482
Voltage plug for bare cable connector set of 2 29348
terminal extensions
set of 4 32485
edgewise pads set of 3 32486
set of 4 32487
spreaders 52,5 mm 3P 32490
4P 32491
70 mm 3P 32492
4P 32493
crimp lugs for copper cable
for cable set of 3 32500
2
240mm set of 4 32501
2 32503
300mm set of 4
crimp lugs for aluminium cable
2
240mm set of 4 32505
2
300mm set of 4 32507
terminal shields
short, 45 mm (1 pair) 3P 32562
4P 32563
long, 45 mm (1 pair) 3P 32564
4P 32565
long for spreaders, 52.5 mm (1 pair, 3P 32582
supplied with insulating plate) 4P 32583
Insulation Kit U 600 V
45 mm pole distance 3P 32580
4P 32581
for spreaders, 52,5 mm 3P 32582
(long terminal shields + insulding plate) 4P 32583
phase barriers set of 6 32570
2 insulating screens 52,5 mm pitch 3P 32576

(fixed breaker) 4P 32577
70 mm pitch 3P 32578
4P 32579
shrouded neutral link
630A NSNL630
271
Catalogue numbers
Accessories
Electrical auxiliaries OF or SD or SDE or SDV 29450
OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level 29452
voltage releases
AC voltage MX MN
24 V 50/60 Hz 29384 29404
48 V 50/60 Hz 29385 29405
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 29386 29406
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 29387 29407
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50 Hz 29388 29408
440-480 V 60 Hz
525 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz 29389 29409
DC voltage MX MN
12 V 29382 29402
24 V 29390 29410
30 V 29391 29411
48 V 29392 29412
60 V 29383 29403
125 V 29393 29413
250 V 29394 29414
MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay 29420
delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz 29426
delay unit 220/240 V 50/60 Hz 29427
motor mechanism modules
AC voltage MT400 MT630
48-60 V 50/60 Hz 32639 32839
110-130 V 50/60 Hz 32640 32840
220-240 V 50/60 Hz 32641 32841
208-277 V 60 Hz
380-415 V 50 Hz 32642 32842
440-480 V 60 Hz 32647 32847
DC voltage MT400 MT630
24-30 V 32643 32843
48-60 V 32644 32844
110-130 V 32645 32845
250 V 32646 32846
motor mechanism accessories
locking device with Ronis/Profolux keylock (not included) 32649
operations counter 32648
communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers
LV installation control and OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switches 32551
monitoring (Digipact) for Compact NS400/630
communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switches

for Compact NS circuit breakers
"connected /disconnected" position indication switches 29296
for Compact NS400/630
motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers

32652
MT400 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE
for Compact NS400
MT630 220-240V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE 32848
for Compact NS630
ammeter module
Indication and rating (A) 400 630
measurement modules 3P 32655
32656
32855
4P 32856
8 ammeter module I max.

rating (A)
3P
current transformer module
400
34852
630
34853
rating (A) 400 600

3P 32657 32857
4P 32658 32858
insulation monitoring module

3P 32659
4P 32660
voltage presence indicator 32566
272
Compact NS400/630N/H/L
Accessories
extended rotary handle

telescopic handle for withdrawable device 32603
1 early-break switch 32605
2 early-make switches 29346
cable operated mechanism for flange handles
flange handle
chrome finish 37004
toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks
Locks by removable device 29370
by fixed device 32631
locking of the rotary handle

locking of the motor mechanism modules

interlocking mechanical for circuit breakers

Interlocking with toggles 32614
with rotary handles 32621
interlocking with key (2 keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles

keylock adapter (keylock not included) 32604 (1)
1 set of 2 keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500 41950
keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
(1) for only 1 device
* Requires Castell lock type K, form 4. manual source changeover
Bolt projection = 19mm, initial projection is flush. Castell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle 92325*
templates for front panel cut-outs

Installation accessories toggle 32556
Vigi module 29316
rotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40 32558
Vigi module or ammeter IP405 29318
toggle cover IP45

sealing accessories
32560
29375
8
273
Catalogue numbers
Accessories
auxiliary connections
Plug-in/withdrawable 1 fixed withdrawable part with 9 wires (for base) 29273
1 moving withdrawable part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker) 32523
configuration accessories 1 support for 3 moving connectors 32525
9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving) 29272
plug-in base accessories
long insulated terminals set of 3 32526
set of 4 32527
2 IP4 shutters for base 32521
chassis accessories
extended escutcheon toggle 32534
Vigi 29285
locking devices (keylock not included) 29286
2 position indicating switches (connected/disconnected) 29287
parts of plug-in kit
plug-in base FC/RC 3P 32516
4P 32517
set of 2 power connections for standard 32518
Vigi 32519
safety trip for advanced opening 32520
parts of withdrawable kit
fixed part (for base) 3P/4P 32532
moving part (for circuit breaker) 32533
100 identification labels 29314

Spare parts battery for STR43ME or STR53UE 32434
lever extension 32553
screwbag 32552
sheet-metal enclosure IP40 for
Individual enclosures Compact NS400/630 MGE2
Vigicompact NS400/630 MGE2E
Cable extension box NS400/630 MGEX630
test kits
Test kits mini test kit 43362
portable test kit 34547

wiring kit (spare part) 34546
274
NS630b to NS1600 fixed
manually operated
Complete device
Compact NS type N
Front-connected circuit breaker
Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
with Micrologic 2.0 control unit NS630b 33460 33463
NS800 33466 33469
NS1000 33472 33475
NS1250 33478 33480
NS1600 33482 33484
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33461 33464
NS800 33467 33470
NS1000 33473 33476
NS1250 33479 33481
NS1600 33483 33485
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33462 33465
NS800 33468 33471
NS1000 33474 33477
Front-connected circuit breaker Compact NS type N

Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
with Micrologic 5.0 control unit
NS630b 33546 33549
NS800 33552 33555
NS1000 33558 33561
NS1250 33564 33566
NS1600 33568 33570
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33547 33550
NS800 33553 33556
NS1000 33559 33562
NS1250 33565 33567
NS1600 33569 33571
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33548 33551
NS800 33554 33557
NS1000 33560 33563
Front-connected Compact NS type NA 3P 4P

NS630b 33486 33491
switch-disconnector
NS800 33487 33492
NS1000 33488 33493
NS1250 33489 33494
NS1600 33490 33495
Note: Select in addition the connection accessories, device accessories and auxiliaries, control unit accessories and communications options, as required.
8
275
Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 fixed
manually operated (cont.)
Device based on separate components

Compact NS type N
Basic circuit breaker Icu = 50 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33220 33224
NS800 33230 33234
NS1000 33240 33244
NS1250 33250 33254
NS1600 33260 33264
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33221 33225
NS800 33231 33235
NS1000 33241 33245
NS1250 33251 33255
NS1600 33261 33265
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33222 33226
NS800 33232 33236
NS1000 33242 33246
+ Micrologic control units
Without ammeter With ammeter
(option A)
Basic protection 2.0 33504 33505
Selective protection 5.0 33511 33512
Selective + earth-fault protection 6.0 33513
Selective + earth-leakage protection 7.0 33514
Basic switch disconnector Compact NS type NA

3P 4P
NS630b 33420 33421
NS800 33422 33423
NS1000 33424 33425
NS1250 33426 33427
NS1600 33428 33429
Front connection
Connections for circuit breakers 3P 4P
and switch disconnectors 630/1000 A Top 33598 33608
Bottom 33599 33609
1250 A Top 33600 33610
630/1000 A Bottom 33601 33611
type L
1600 A Top 33602 33612
Bottom 33603 33613
Rear connection
3P 4P
Vertical Top 33604 33614
Bottom 33605 33615
Horizontal Top 33606 33616
8 To order a complete device, order:

■
Bottom
A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector,
33607 33617
■ Connections,
■ Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required.
276
NS630b to NS1600 fixed
electrically operated

Compact NS type N
NS630b 33270 33274
NS800 33280 33284
NS1000 33290 33294
NS1250 33300 33304
NS1600 33310 33314
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33271 33275
NS800 33281 33285
NS1000 33291 33295
NS1250 33301 33305
NS1600 33311 33315
Compact NS type L
Note: The characteristics of Icu = 150 kA at 220/415V 3P 4P
the motor mechanism
NS630b 33272 33276
module for electrical
operation are specified NS800 33282 33286
separately by selecting a NS1000 33292 33296
part number from the table
at the bottom of this page.
(option A)

3P 4P
NS630b 33440 33441
NS800 33442 33443
NS1000 33444 33445
NS1250 33446 33447
NS1600 33448 33449
Note: The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical
operation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table at
the bottom of this page.
277
Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 fixed
electrically operated (cont.)

Front connection
Basic circuit breaker 3P 4P
630/1000 A Top 33598 33608
Bottom 33599 33609
1250 A Top 33600 33610
630/1000 Bottom 33601 33611
A type L
1600 A Top 33602 33612
Bottom 33603 33613
Rear connection
3P 4P
Bottom 33605 33615
Bottom 33607 33617
Motor mechanism module

AC 50/60 Hz DC
Standard Communicating Standard Communicating
48 V 33691 33698 24-30 V 33690 33697
100-130 V 33687 33694 48-60 V 33691 33698
220-240 V 33688 33695 100-130 V 33692 33699
380-415 V 33689 33696 200-250 V 33693 33700
To order a complete device, order:
■ A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector,
■ Connections,
278
Accessories for NS630b to
NS1600 fixed devices
Connection accessories
Front connection Rear connection
Bare-cable connectors + 1 connector shield for 4 cables (240 mm2)
3P (3 parts) 33640
4P (4 parts) 33641
1 long connection shield

3P 33628
4P 33629
3P (3 parts) 33642
4P (4 parts) 33643
Cable lug adapters

3P (3 parts) 33644
4P (4 parts) 33645
Interphase barriers
3P/4P top (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P top (3 parts) 33648
3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33646 3P/4P bottom (3 parts) 33648
Arc chute screen

3P 33596
4P 33597
Brackets for mounting on a horizontal surface

3P/4P (2 parts) 33647
Spreaders
3P 33622 3P 33622
4P 33623 4P 33623
Cable lug kits

240 mm 2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013
4P (8 lug kit) 33014
300 mm 2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015
4P (8 lug kit) 33016
Electrical auxiliaries
Indication contacts
OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450 (*)
Low level 29452 (*)
Up to 3 OF, 1 SD and 1 SDE can be connected (the SDE contact is standard for
electrically operated devices).
Instantaneous voltage releases

MX MN Delay unit for MN
R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable)
12 V DC 33658
24-30 V AC/DC
48-60 V AC/DC
100-130 V AC/DC
200-250 V AC/DC
33659
33660
33661
33662
33668
33669
33670
33671
33684
33685
33680
33681
33682
8
240-277 V AC 33663
380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683
(*) see Compact NS.
279
Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS630b to
NS1600 fixed devices (cont.)
Locking for manually operated devices

Removable toggle locking system
Locking by 3 padlocks 44936
Fixed toggle locking system

Rotary handle for manually operated devices

Devices with direct rotary handles
Handle Black 33863
Red/yellow front 33864
Conversion accessory CNOMO 33866
Locking by keylocks Ronis Profalux
OFF position 33870 33869
OFF and ON positions 33872 33871
Keylock kit (without keylocks) 33868 33868
Mechanical interlocking
For 2 devices with extended rotary handles 33890
Devices with extended rotary handles

Handle Black 33878
Red/yellow front 33879
Telescopic (for chassis-mounted devices) 33880
Control accessories
2 advanced indication contacts (6 A - 240 V)
Early break 33882
Early make 33883
Locking and accessories for electrically operated devices

Pushbutton locking
By transparent cover + padlocks 33897
Locking in OFF position

By Profalux keylocks 1 lock 33902
1 lock + 1 lock with same key profile 33904
By Ronis keylocks 1 lock 33903
Keylock kit (without keylocks) For Profalux keylocks 33898
For Ronis keylocks 33899
For Kirk keylocks 47517
For Castell keylocks 47518
Operation counter CDM
33895
8 Installation accessories
Escutcheon (small cut-out) for manually operated device with toggle 33717
Escutcheon for: - device with toggle (large cutout) 33718
- device with rotary handle
- electrically operated device
280
NS630b to NS1600 manually
operated withdrawable devices

Compact NS type N
NS630b 33320 33324
NS800 33330 33334
NS1000 33340 33344
NS1250 33350 33354
NS1600 33360 33364
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33321 33325
NS800 33331 33335
NS1000 33341 33345
NS1250 33351 33355
NS1600 33361 33365
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33322 33326
NS800 33332 33336
NS1000 33342 33346
(option A)

3P 4P
NS630b 33430 33431
NS800 33432 33433
NS1000 33434 33435
NS1250 33436 33437
NS1600 33438 33439
Basic chassis and Chassis

3P 4P
connections 630/1250 A 33722 33725
1600 A 33723 33726
630/1000 A type L
+ connection
3P 4P
Front connection
Top 33727 33733
Bottom 33728 33734
Rear connection
Horizontal
Bottom
Top
Bottom
33730
33731
33732
33736
33737
33738
8
■ Chassis and connections,
281
Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 electrically
operated withdrawable devices

Compact NS type N
NS630b 33370 33374
NS800 33380 33384
NS1000 33390 33394
NS1250 33400 33404
NS1600 33410 33414
Compact NS type H
Icu = 70 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33371 33375
NS800 33381 33385
NS1000 33391 33395
NS1250 33401 33405
NS1600 33411 33415
Compact NS type L
Icu = 150 kA at 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS630b 33372 33376
Note: The characteristics of NS800 33382 33386
the motor mechanism
module for electrical NS1000 33392 33396
operation are specified + Micrologic control units
separately by selecting a Without ammeter With ammeter
part number from the table (option A)
at the bottom of this page.
Compact NS type NA
Basic switch disconnectors 3P 4P
NS630b 33450 33451
NS800 33452 33453
NS1000 33454 33455
NS1250 33456 33457
NS1600 33458 33459
The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified
separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page.
Chassis and connections Chassis

3P 4P
630/1250 A 33722 33725
1600 A 33723 33726
630/1000 A type L
+ connection
3P 4P
Front connection
Top 33727 33733
Bottom 33728 33734
Rear connection
Bottom 33730 33736
Bottom 33732 33738
Motor mechanism module

AC 50/60 Hz DC
8 48 V
100-130 V
Standard
33831
33827
Communicating
33838
33834
24-30 V
48-60 V
Standard
33830
33831
Communicating
33837
33838
220-240 V 33828 33835 100-130 V 33832 33839
380-415 V 33829 33836 200-250 V 33833 3384-0
■ Connections,
282
Accessories for NS630b to
NS1600 withdrawable devices
Vertical-connection adapters for front-connected chassis
3P (3 parts) 33642
4P (4 parts) 33643
Cable lug adapters for front-connected chassis

3P (3 parts) 33644
4P (4 parts) 33645
Interphase barriers for rear-connected chassis

3P/4P (3 parts) 33768
Spreaders for front-connected and rear-connected chassis

3P (3 parts) 33622
4P (4 parts) 33623
Cable lug kits 240 mm 2 3P (6 lug kit) 33013

4P (8 lug kit) 33014
300 mm 2 3P (6 lug kit) 33015
4P (8 lug kit) 33016
Chassis accessories
Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) 3P 33763
4P 33764
Safety shutters (VO) 3P 33765

4P 33766
SD trip indication contact for manually operated devices
6 A - 240 V 33800
Low level 33803
SDE fault indication contact for manually operated devices

6 A - 240 V 33799
Low level 33802
OF ON/OFF indication contacts 6 A - 240 V 33801

Low level 33804
Up to 3 OF contacts per device
CE, CD, CT carriage switches

6 A - 240 V 33170
Low level 33171
Up to 3 CE, 1 CT, 2 CD per device

12 V DC 33658
24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668
48-60 V AC/DC
100-130 V AC/DC
200-250 V AC/DC
33660
33661
33662
33669
33670
33671
33684
33685
33680
33681
33682
8
240-277 V AC 33663
380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683
Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone
3 wire terminal (30 parts) 47071
6 wire terminal (10 parts) 47072
Jumpers (10 parts) 47900
283
NS1600 withdrawable devices (cont.)
Chassis locking
Keylocking in disconnected position
Profalux 1 lock 33773
2 locks (with different key profiles) 33775
Ronis 1 lock 33776
2 locks (with different key profiles) 33778
Option for locking in connected, disconnected and test positions 33779
Keylock kit (without keylocks)
Profalux 33769
Ronis 33770
Castell 33771
Kirk 33772
Door interlock
Right side of chassis (VPECD) 33786
Left side of chassis (VPECG) 33787
Racking interlock (VPOC)

33788
Mismatch protection (VDC)

33767
Installation accessories
Escutcheon
33857
Transparent cover for escutcheon

33859
Blanking plate
33858
284
Common accessories for NS630b
to NS1600 withdrawable devices
Communications options
For fixed devices
Modbus COM 33702 33708
Digipact COM 33705 33711
For moving part
Modbus COM 33842 33848
Digipact COM 33845 33851
+ chassis
Modbus 33852 33852
Digipact 33855 33855

Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)
Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542
Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543
High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544
Without long-time protection OFF 33545
External sensors
External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)
CT rating: 400/1600 A 33576

280 mm x 115 mm 33577
Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection

External sensor (SGR) 33579
MDGF summing module 48891
External power supply module

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
125 V DC 54442
110 V AC 54443
220 V DC 54444
380 V DC 54445
Test equipment
Mini test kit
33594
Portable test kit

33595
Spare parts 8
Toggle extension
46996
285
Catalogue numbers Common accessories for NS630b
to NS1600 withdrawable devices
(cont.)
Mechanisal interlocking for source changeover

Interlocking using connecting rods for Compact electrically operated devices
Complete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + rods
2 Compact fixed devices 33910
2 Compact withdrawable devices 33913
Interlocking using cables for Compact electrically operated devices

Complete assembly with 2 adaptation fixtures + cables
2 Compact fixed devices 33911
2 Compact withdrawable devices 33914
1 Compact fixed + 1 Compact withdrawable device 33915
286
NS1600b to NS3200 fixed,
front-connected,
manually operated device
Circuit breaker Compact NS type N

Icu = 85 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS1600b 34000 34003
NS2000 34006 34009
NS2500 34012 34015
NS3200 34018 34021
Compact NS type H
Icu = 120 kA to 220/415 V 3P 4P
NS1600b 34001 34004
NS2000 34007 34010
NS2500 34013 34016
NS3200 34019 34022
(option A)
Switch disconnector Compact NS type NA

3P 4P
NS1600b 34024 34025
NS2000 34027 34028
NS2500 34030 34031
NS3200 34033 34034
Optional vertical 1600/2500 A 3P (3 parts) 33975

4P (4 parts) 33976
connection adaptor Note: Standard for 3200 A.
Indication contacts
OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 240 V 29450
Low level 29452
Up to 3 OF, 1 SD an d 1 SDE can be connected.

12 V DC 33658
24-30 V AC/DC 33659 33668
48-60 V AC/DC 33660 33669 33680
100-130 V AC/DC 33661 33670 33684 33681
200-250 V AC/DC 33662 33671 33685 33682
240-277 V AC 33663
380-480 V AC 33664 33673 33683
Locking
Removable toggle locking system
8
Fixed toggle locking system
(*) see Compact NS.
287
NS3200
Communications options
Modbus COM 33986

Digipact COM 33987

Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range)
Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 33542
Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir 33543
High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir 33544
Without long-time protection OFF 33545
External sensors
External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE)
CT rating: 1000/4000 A 34026

470 mm x 160 mm 33578
Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection

External sensor (SGR) 33579
MDGF summing module 48891
External power supply module

24-30 V DC 54440
48-60 V DC 54441
125 V DC 54442
110 V AC 54443
220 V DC 54444
380 V DC 54445
Test equipment
Mini test kit
33594
Portable test kit
8 33595
Spare parts
Toggle extension
NS3200 toggle extension for replacement 33997
288
Communication bus accessories
and display modules
RS485 Modbus pre-wired system

RS485 Modbus junction block
CJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction block 50963
RS485 Modbus connector

CSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminals 50964
RS485 Modbus cables

CDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m length 50960
CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable

(4 RS485 wires + 2 power wires) 3 m length 50961
CCR301: RS485 roll cable

(2 RS485 wires + 2 power wires) 60 m length 50965
Digipact Bus pre-wired system

Data concentrator DC150
Auxiliary supply voltage
110-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz and 115-125 V DC 50823
Junction block
Junction block for internal Bus 50778
Cables
Cable for internal bus 20-meter roll (0.75 mm 2) 50779
100-meter roll (0.75 mm2) 50780
Converter
RS485/RS232 (ACE909) 12 V DC power supply included 50786
RS485/RS232 (1) TSX SCA72
RS485/Ethernet (1) 174 CEV 300-10
RS485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) (2) 3050 EGW2
(1) SeeTelemecanique catalogue.
(2) See PowerLogic catalogue.
289
Catalogue numbers Compact NS100 to NS630
Source changeover
Manual source changeover

mechanical interlocking
for toggle controlled circuit-breakers NS100...250 29354
NS400...630 32614
for rotary handled circuit-breakers NS100...630 29369
key lock interlocking

for rotary handled or remote controlled circuit breakers
2 locks, 1 key Ronis 1351.500 41950
Profalux KS5 B24 D4Z 42878
Remote controlled source changeover

plate + IVE source /source 24/250 V DC 48/415 V AC 50/60 Hz
"normal" "replacement" (identical voltages)
440 V 60 Hz
NS100...250 /NS100...250 29351 29350
composed of: plate 29349 29349
IVE (1) 29356 29352
auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
back sockets option add:
only long RC (2) (2)
plug in base option add:
plug in kit (2) (2)
NS400...630 /NS100...630 32611 32610
composed of: plate 32609 32609
IVE (1) 29356 29352
auxiliary switches 2 OF + 2 SDE 4 x 29450 4 x 29450
back sockets option add:
only long RC (2) (2)
plug in base option add:
plug in kit (2) (2)
adaptator kit for NS100...250 1 x 32618 1 x 32618
control unit option 220/240 V AC 380/415 V AC
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
440 V 60 Hz
ACP + control unit BA 29470 29471
composed of: plate ACP (1) 29363 29364
control unit BA (1) 29376 29377
ACP + control unit UA 29472 29473
control unit UA (1) 29378 29380
ACP + control unit UA150 (communication option) 29474 29475
control unit UA150 (1) 29379 29381
wiring cable between BA/UA and ACP/IVE 29368 29368
(1) the supply voltages BA/UA control unit, ACP plate, IVE and the remote control must be identical whatever the source changeover type.
(2) see products pages.
downstream coupling accessories
"normal"/"replacement"
NS100...250/NS100...250 250 A 3P 29358
4P 29359
NS400...630/NS400...630 630 A 3P 32619
4P 32620
290
Typical composition of remote controlled source changeover
remote controlled source changeover
1 normal device N (1)

+ 1 replacement device R (2)
+ 2 remote controls (3)
+ 1 plate with interlocking (4) with IVE (5) and its wiring (8)
+ 2 plug-in kits (if plug-in version)
+ 1 adaptor kit for NS100...250
plug-in (if NS400...630 with NS100...250)
+ auxilary switches (6)
2 x (1 OF + 1 SDE) for Compact NS100...630
+ 1 downstream coupling accessory (7) for Compact NS100...630 (option)
+ long RC (if back connection)
IVE voltages and remote controls are identical.

associated control unit
1 source changeover without associated control unit
+ 1 ACP (9) with BA control unit (10)
or + 1 ACP (9) with UA control unit (11)
or + 1 ACP (9) with UA150 control unit (11)
note: the cable (12) between ACP and BA/UA must be produced
by the person doing the installation
IVE voltages + remote control + ACP + BA or UA are identical.
291
9
292
Compact NS More information about
Schneider Electric
Presentation 8
Dimensions 155
Connection 193
9
293
Get more with the world’s
power and control specialist
Schneider Electric’s expertise is founded on the

skills of its four international brands –
Merlin Gerin, Modicon, Square D and
Telemecanique and has accumulated over 100
years experience in the electrical industry.
We have established an enviable reputation as a

world and UK leader in the distribution and control
of electrical power. We regard our customers as
commercial partners; technical specialists who,
like us, demand the highest standards of
excellence in terms of products and projects and
services. We are proud to provide the solutions
that meet their needs.
Schneider Electric also operates the largest, dedicated

sales force in the UK electrical industry.
Sales Engineers have specialist expertise and an
understanding of the customer needs within each of
the following market sectors:
■ Commercial and Industrial Buildings
■ Energy and Infrastructure
■ Industrial Processes and Machines
9
The real reason for putting technology into buildings is
to simplify tasks, enhance safety and improve the
quality of life. Schneider Electric knows this and has
created attractive, functional products for the
residential building sector. Well-being and comfort are
key concepts in this area.
The same objectives apply to commercial

buildings such as offices, hotels, shopping
centres, hospitals, schools and care
facilities for the elderly. Schneider Electric
offer a wide range of solutions in the area
of building management services and uses
its expertise in all of these buildings to
protect people and equipment.
Schneider Electric means greater comfort, lower operating costs and enhanced safety.
Related industries Principal customers in the construction market
■ Retail ■ Contracting authorities
■ Education ■ Main contractors
■ Health ■ Building engineers
■ Entertainment centres
■ Offices
■ Warehouses
■ Agriculture
■ Factory
■ Private residential
■ Public residential
9
Energy
Schneider Electric is involved in the entire electrical distribution chain from power plants
to end users. Customer demand for complete availability, uncompromising quality and
absolute safety has made the search for excellence our key mission.
Today, electrical substation and network protection, monitoring and control are highly
effective in reducing outage time.
Proven technologies offer a wide range of simple, efficient and flexible solutions for
optimised, step-by-step investments.
Infrastructure
Schneider Electric is involved in
developing infrastructure and
transportation systems around the world.
In areas where no failures can be
tolerated, such as road and rail equipment,
harbour installations and airports,
Schneider Electric provides solutions in
electrical distribution, control and
monitoring, automation and supervision.
Key markets
■ Electricity distribution
■ Water
■ Rail
■ Airports
■ Seaports
Principal customers in the electric
■ Defence power market
■ Gas ■ Power suppliers involved in

generation and distribution
■ Telecommunications
■ Utility companies
■ Road
■ Major contractors
■ Large end user sites
9 ■ Government departments
Schneider Electric focus on performance in all areas of industry.
Our products and services adapt to each specific business and
environment, from manufacturing and production lines to
continuous processes in a wide variety of industries, such as:
■ Automotive
■ Pharmaceutical
■ Petrochemical
■ Food and beverage
■ Oil/steel/coal
■ Packaging
■ Material handling
Principal customers in the industry market
■ Large multinational industrial groups
■ Small and medium-sized manufacturers
■ Original equipment manufacturers
■ System integrators
■ Contractors/panel builders
■ Electrical equipment distributors
9
Schneider Electric Services - complete life cycle support
Schneider Electric offers you the complete solution. A comprehensive array of fully
integrated, high quality products, supported by a premium services offer.
Complete life cycle support encompasses the total ‘services’ needs of customers.
This ranges across a broad spectrum of support services, from initial conceptual design,
through to crucial After Sales support.
Modernise Equipment survey Design

End of life cycle Network studies
Retrofit System layout and design
Remote monitoring Project management
Technical support Energy efficiency
Adaptation Application studies
Complete life
cycle support
Operate Install
Spares and repairs Equipment supply
24 hour a day assistance Installation
Extended warranty Test
Preventative maintenance Commissioning
Training
To complement the high standard of

services, Schneider Electric also offer a
comprehensive programme of 48 training
courses intended to increase customers’
product knowledge and associated skills.
9
9
Nationwide support on one number -
call the Customer Information Centre on
0870 608 8 608

Fax 0870 608 8 606
Schneider Electric’s local support
Schneider Electric is committed to supporting its customers at every stage of a project. Our 180 sales engineers, the largest
dedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry, operate from 4 customer support centres.
Our sales engineers are skilled at assessing individual requirements and combined with the expert support of our product
specialists, will develop the most effective and economical answer taking relevant regulations and standards fully into account.
To access the expertise of the Schneider Electric group, please call 0870 608 8 608. Each customer support centre includes
facilities for demonstrations and training, and presentation rooms fully equipped with audio visual and video, providing
excellent meeting facilities.
Get more
Merlin Gerin is a world leader in the manufacture and
supply of high, medium and low voltage products for the
distribution, protection, control and management of
electrical systems. Its quality products, solutions and
services are focused on the needs of both the commercial
and industrial sectors.
with the world’s
Modicon is a world leader in high technology
programmable controllers (PLCs) and motion control
Power
systems used in industrial automation. Its international
catalogue includes PLCs, numerical controllers, terminals,
& Control
software, multiple fieldbus and ethernet communication
networks, and human machine interfaces (HMI).
specialist
Square D is a total quality organisation and its business
is to put electricity to work productively and effectively,
protecting people, buildings and equipment. Its low voltage
electrical distribution equipment, systems and services are
used extensively in residential and commercial applications.
Telemecanique is a UK market leader and world expert

in industrial control and automation. It provides complete
solutions, with its range of components, programmable
logic controllers, variable speed drives and communications
software. In addition, it offers power distribution through
prefabricated busbar trunking.
Local customer support centres

Scotland South West North West Greater London
Schneider Electric Ltd Schneider Electric Ltd Schneider Electric Ltd Schneider Electric Ltd
Unit 11000 190 Park Avenue 8 Brindley Road 2nd Floor
Academy Business Park Aztec West City Park Business Village 408 Strand
Gower Street Almondsbury Cornbrook London WC2R 0NE
Glasgow G51 1PR Bristol BS32 4TP Manchester M16 9HQ webmasterGB@schneider.co.uk
webmasterGB@schneider.co.uk webmasterGB@schneider.co.uk webmasterGB@schneider.co.uk
Regional product showrooms

Industrial processes and machines product showroom
Schneider Electric Ltd, University of Warwick Science Park, Sir William Lyons Road, Coventry CV4 7EZ
Commercial and industrial buildings product showroom

Schneider Electric Ltd, Fordhouse Road, Wolverhampton WV10 9ED
Energy and infrastructure product showroom

Schneider Electric Ltd, 123 Jack Lane, Hunslet, Leeds LS10 1BS

7.1 - 7.2 - 7.3 MG MCCBs

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

7.1 - 7.2 - 7.3 MG MCCBs

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Merlin Gerin

Compact LV circuit breakers

Compact NS 100 to 250 A

The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994

Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate,

Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic control

A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories is

Compact NS, simply a step ahead…

Manual Compact NS250 Compact NS250 with motor

...optimised protection and

...an optimised range

Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

Protection of LV distribution systems Page 18

Protection of motor feeders Page 44

Protection of industrial control panels Page 52

The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to

Earth-leakage protection Page 54

A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit

Source-changeover systems Page 66 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue)

N R To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are

The Compact NS range now covers all Compact NS100 to 630

IEC 947-2 cat A

IEC 947-2 cat A

L: very high breaking

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers

Compact NS400 with Withdrawable Compact

Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800

Compact NS2000 (manually operated only)

Compact circuit breakers make it 5 frame sizes from 80 to 3200 A

630 to 1600 A 1600 to 3200 A

Plug-in and withdrawable

Each Compact NS circuit breaker Compact NS100 to 630

TM thermal-magnetic Voltage presence indication

STR electronic trip unit Ammeter module

Compact NS630b to 3200

Micrologic 2.0, 5.0 Micrologic 2.0 A,

A complete system of add-on modules for 16

1 Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate

frame size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g.

Open communication ...

Digipact installation-management system

... and protection of the environment

Selection of a Compact NS circuit breaker Presentation 8

MERLIN GERIN Compliance with standards

(1) -40° C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen.

Installation in class II switchboards

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard

With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07

With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08

With motor mechanism IP40 IK07

Protection of distribution systems means

Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A Page 22

Special case of DC systems: Breaking capacity N 50 50 50 50 50

1000 V distribution Page 38

STR23SP electronic trip unit

Compact circuit breakers

Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui

TM (thermal-magnetic) STR22 (electronic) STR23 (electronic) STR53 (electronic)

1.6 to 1.9 / 2.1 to 2.3 6.0 / 7.8

Compact circuit breakers

2 Electrical characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN 60947-2